Yamaha DVR-S200 Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: DVR-S200

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: Handleiding

Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor

DVX-S200

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

DVD HOME THEATER SOUND SYSTEM

DVX-S200

(DVR-S200+NX-S200+NX-C200+NX-SW200)

OWNER’S MANUAL

U B

DVD/Super Audio CD RECEIVER

DVR-S200

Printed in Malaysia WB85540

cv_DVX-S200_UB.p65 03.10.9, 3:26 PM1

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead

symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is

intended to alert you to the presence of

uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of

sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of

electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an

equilateral triangle is intended to alert you

to the presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance

with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat

registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that

produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with

one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two

blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the

provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an

electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point

where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,

or table specified by the manufacturer, or

sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used,

use caution when moving the cart/apparatus

combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when

unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is

required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way,

such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has

been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the

apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not

operate normally, or has been dropped.

15 Be sure to allow spaces of at least 10 cm above, behind and

on both sides of DVR-S200, and at least 20 cm above, behind

and on both sides of NX-SW200.

16 Do not place the following objects on this unit:

A vessel with water in it.

If the vessel falls by vibrations and water spills, it may cause

damage to the unit, and/or you may get an electric shock.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear or the bottom of

this unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

DVX-S200_UB.p65 03.10.20, 0:46 PM2

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment

by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through

loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most

importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged

exposure from excessive volume levels.

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions

contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements.

Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void

your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT :

When connecting this product to accessories and/or another

product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all

installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could

void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE :

This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class

“B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements

provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this

product in a residential environment will not result in harmful

interference with other electronic devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not

installed and used according to the instructions found in the

users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is

found to be the source of interference, which can be determined

by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected

by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker

or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change

the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type

of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please

contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe

Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed

by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

English

DVX-S200_UB.p65 03.10.20, 0:46 PM3

CAUTION

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures

other than those specified herein may result in hazardous

radiation exposure.

● The name plate is located on the bottom of the unit.

This product is a DVD home theater sound system consisting of the

components shown on the table.

Please check to make sure that all of the components listed in the

table are included.

Model name Category No. of pcs

DVR-S200 DVD/Super Audio CD 1

RECEIVER

NX-S200 Satellite Speaker 4

(for front/surround)

NX-C200 Center speaker 1

NX-SW200 Subwoofer 1

NX-SW200

Do not hold near the protrusions on the

bottom of subwoofer. There protrusions

are built to protect the woofer, but they

can catch your finger and cause bodily

injury.

iii

DVX-S200_UB.p65 03.10.20, 0:46 PM4

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

DVR-S200

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long

as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is

turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state,

this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot

and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-

003.

DANGER

When this unit is plugged to the wall outlet, do not place your eyes

close to the opening of the disc tray and other openings to look into

inside.

The laser component in this product is capable of emitting

radiation exceeding the limit for Class 1.

DVR-S200

The name plate is located on the bottom of the unit.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR

MOISTURE.

■ For U.K. customers

If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied

with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug

fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below.

Note

• The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug

with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket

outlet.

■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

Blue: NEUTRAL

Brown: LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus

may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the

terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal

of the three pin plug.

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual

carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean

place with at least 10 cm on the top, 10 cm on the left and right,

and 10 cm at the back of DVR-S200, and 20 cm on the top, 20

cm on the left and right, and 20 cm at the back of NX-SW200

— away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust,

moisture, and/or cold.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,

or transformers to avoid humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from

cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with

high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent

condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical

shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto

this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or

splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or

discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid

may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to

this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc.

in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside

this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or

personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are

complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly

causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp

the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might

damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this

unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may

cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage

resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than

specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord

from the wall outlet during an electrical storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified

YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The

cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.

vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “Solutions to Common Problems” section

on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is

faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit

in standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the

wall outlet.

18 Do not place much pressure against the Subwoofer port (front

opening). The port or the unit may fall resulting in injury.

19 Do not place anything fragile beside the Subwoofer, as air

pressure is produced that may break it, result in malfunction or

cause injury.

20 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature

changes suddenly. Disconnect the power cord from the outlet,

then leave the unit alone.

21 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become

warm. Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling.

English

DVX-S200_UB.p65 03.10.20, 0:46 PM5

In a few steps, a whole new world of DVD will open up.

Settle into your favorite place

on the sofa and let the show begin.

LET’S GET THINGS READY!

➡Page 6, “Preparation”

Decide on a place for the speakers, perform a few simple connections, and that’s all there

is to it.

• Connecting Speakers and TV to CinemaStation couldn’t be easier.

• Connecting the Speaker Cables with one touch colored connectors.

Come on, let’s watch a DVD!

➡Page 10, “Basic Operations”

Transform your room into a home theater in 3 steps.

Double and triple your enjoyment by

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT.

➡Page 46, “Using Other Equipment”

• Enhance the feeling of movement with DSP Programs when you play video games.

• Listen to and record CD-R and MiniDisc media.

• View and dub video media.

Connect Speakers and TV

Play a disc

Select a sound field

• Sound fields to match the movie you are viewing and

experience the feeling of being there.

• Progressive scan technology for enjoying high-quality

video even on a large screen.

001DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:08 AM2

Enjoy playing A VARIETY OF DISCS!

➡Page 28, “Playing Video and Music Discs”

In 3 short steps, play everything from commercial CDs to your own homemade discs.

It’s time to TAKE YOUR LISTENING

EXPERIENCE UP A NOTCH!

➡Page 54, “Creating the Best Listening Space”

• With the Speakers you can create a sound space to match the listening environment of the room.

• The Matrix 6.1 Decoder provides virtual surround back speakers for experiencing a remarkable

acoustic presence.

• “SILENT CINEMA” provides an incredible listening presence with headphones.

Let’s listen to an FM/AM

BROADCAST!

➡Page 38, “Listening to the Radio”

In 2 quick steps you can enjoy live radio broadcasts.

• Enjoy playing all types of discs including audio and video CDs, Super Audio

CDs and MP3 music recorded on CD-Rs.

• Create the sound and ambience to match the music you are listening to, whether

it be the excitement of a nightclub or the acoustics of a concert hall.

• In addition to Auto Tuning, you can use various controls

including Auto Preset for FM channels.

Connect Speakers

Play a disc

Select a sound field

Connect Speakers and Antennas

Select a channel

English

001DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:08 AM3

CONTENTS

Basic

Advanced

Playing back a DVD

Advanced Features

Names and Functions of Parts Page 18

Top and Front Page 18

CinemaStation Display Page 20

Remote Control Features Page 21

Amp Mode Button Names and Functions Page 22

DVD/CD Mode Button Names and Functions Page 23

Using the On Screen Menu Page 24

Selecting the Media Device

Selecting the Equipment Page 26

Playing Video and Music Discs

Playback Methods Page 28

Selecting a Scene or Tune Page 28

Customizing Playback Order (Program Play) Page 31

Repeating a Disc or Track (Repeat Play) Page 34

Using a Disc Menu Page 36

MP3 Playback Features Page 37

Playing a Super Audio CD Page 37

Preparation

Introduction Page 6

About this Manual Page 6

Supplied Accessories Page 6

Preparing the Remote Control Page 7

Preparing the Speakers Page 7

Placing the Speakers Page 7

Connecting the Speakers and TV Page 8

Basic Operations

Viewing a DVD Page 10

Useful Features Page 13

Selecting the Audio Language Page 13

Selecting the Subtitle Language Page 13

Moving Forward and Backward Page 13

Adjusting the Audio Volume Page 13

Pausing Playback Page 13

Switching the Viewing Angle Page 14

Restarting Playback from the Stop Position

(Memory Resume) Page 14

Enhancing the Sound Presence Page 15

Turning off the Sound Page 15

Controlling the DVDs Your Children Can View Page 15

Enhancing Video Quality Page 15

Answers to Common Problems Page 15

Sound Presence

Finding the Best DSP Effect Page 16

001DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:08 AM4

Listening to the Radio

Connecting the Antennas Page 38

Connecting the FM Antenna Page 38

Connecting the AM Loop Antenna Page 38

Listening to the Radio Page 39

Selecting the Radio Tuner Page 39

Selecting Radio Stations Page 39

Setting Channels in Advance (Preset) Page 41

Selecting a Preset Station (Preset Tuning) Page 43

Changing the Order of Preset Stations Page 43

Receiving RDS Stations

(U.K. and Europe models only) Page 44

Using Other Equipment

Connecting Video Equipment Page 46

Connecting a Game Console or VCR Page 46

Operating a VCR Page 48

Playing a Video Game or Operating

a Video Camera Page 48

Dubbing from a Video Camera to a VCR Page 49

Connecting Audio Equipment Page 50

Connecting a CD or MD Recorder Page 50

Playing a CD or MD Page 53

Recording Audio from CinemaStation Page 53

Creating the Best Listening Space

Placing the Speakers (NX-P200) Page 54

Placing the Center Speaker Page 54

Placing the Subwoofer Page 54

Placing the Front and Surround Speakers Page 55

Using Commercially Available Speakers

or Cables Page 57

Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level Page 59

Adjusting the Speaker Balance with a Test Tone Page 59

Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level

During Playback Page 61

Setting the Speaker Size Page 63

Setting the Speaker Mode Page 63

More Information about DSP (Surround)

Effects

Selecting DSP Program Effects Page 65

Using Matrix 6.1 Page 65

Using All Speakers for CD or Video Playback Page 67

Using Front Speakers Only for DSP Program

(Virtual Cinema DSP) Page 69

Using a DSP Program with Headphones

(“SILENT CINEMA”) Page 70

Using a DSP Program with Low Volume

(Night Listening) Page 71

Changing the Delay Time of a DSP Program Page 72

Reproducing the Original Dolby and DTS Sound Page 74

Reproducing Stereo Sound Page 75

Types of Input Signals

Types of Input Signals Page 76

Checking Sound Information

(Input Signal Information Display) Page 76

Switching Input Modes Page 78

Additional Features

Using the Sleep Timer Page 79

Enjoying High-Quality Video

Progressive Scan (NTSC only) Page 80

Protecting Your Children

from Undesirable Material Page 81

Setting the Password and Parental

Control Level Page 81

Locking a Disc Page 83

Operating Other Equipment with the

CinemaStation Remote Control

Storing Manufacturer Codes

in the Remote Control Page 84

Setting the Manufacturer Code Page 84

Available Operations Page 85

Manufacturer Code List Page 87

Using the SET MENU

Using the SET MENU Page 89

SET MENU List Page 89

Navigating the SET MENU Page 90

Using the On Screen Menu

Using the On Screen Menu Page 93

Navigating the On Screen Menu Page 93

On Screen Menu Guide Page 95

Appendix

Solutions to Common Problems Page 97

General Problems Page 97

Disc Playback Page 100

Radio Reception Page 101

Remote Control Page 102

Information Page 103

Glossary Page 106

Index Page 108

Specifications Page 110

CONTENTS

English

001DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:08 AM5

Preparation

Supplied Accessories

Remote Control

Make sure all of the following accessories are in the box.

System Control Cable

(5 m (1))

Batteries (2)

(AA, R06, UM-3)

AM Loop Antenna

Indoor FM Antenna

Speaker Cables (Surround: 15 m (2),

Front, Center: 5 m (3))

DVR-S200

NX-P200: NX-S200, NX-C200, NX-SW200

Video Pin Cable

Subwoofer Cable

(1 pin, 5 m, (1))

Screws (M4 ✕ 10) (Front,

Surround Speakers (4))

Mounting Brackets (Front,

Surround Speakers (4))

Non-Skid Pads

(Subwoofer, 1 Set (4))

Fasteners (Center Speaker (2))

Non-Skid Pads (Front, Surround

Speakers, 4 Sets (16))

About this Manual

● explains additional operating tips that you

may find useful.

● indicates an operation that you should

definitely perform.

● In this manual, operations that can be performed on

either the DVD/Super Audio CD Receiver or Remote

Control are explained using the Remote Control.

● In this manual, Remote Control descriptions and

illustrations are based on models other than those in

the U.K. or Europe. Any exceptions are clearly stated.

Introduction

Your DVD Home Theater Sound System DVX-S200 consists of the following components.

DVD/Super Audio CD Receiver (DVR-S200) 1 unit

Speaker Set (NX-P200) Satellite Speakers (Front, Surround) (NX-S200) 4 units

Center Speaker (NX-C200) 1 unit

Subwoofer (NX-SW200) 1 unit

● This Owner’s Manual was printed before final product

development. After printing, some product

specifications may change due to operational upgrades

and other reasons. In this case, the specifications of the

product itself will take precedence over the

specifications in this manual.

● In some cases, graphics or terms used may differ

slightly from the actual product or packaging to

facilitate explanation.

Explanations in this Owner’s Manual are based on the DVX-S200 (DVD/Super Audio CD Receiver (DVR-S200) and

Speaker Set (NX-P200)). If you use speakers other than NX-P200, make sure to set the speaker size and volume level

in advance.

→Page 63, “Setting the Speaker Size”

→Page 59, “Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level”

Advice

Please...

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

(U.S.A., Canada,

Korea, Asia and

General models)

(Europe, U.K. and

Australia models)

002DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:09 AM6

B asic

Preparation

Preparing the Remote Control

Put the batteries in the Remote Control.

Preparing the Speakers

The Front Speakers, Surround Speakers, Center Speaker and Subwoofer have special roles based on the type of sound each produces.

• The Front Speakers produce front channel sound (stereo) and sound effects.

• The Surround Speakers produce surround sound and sound effects.

• The Center Speaker produces sound oriented toward the center of the screen such as dialog or vocals.

• The Subwoofer produces bass sounds and the LFE signal contained in Dolby Digital and DTS.

• You can secure the Center Speaker, Front/Surround Speakers or

Subwoofer in place using fasteners or non-skid pads. You can

hang the Front and Surround Speakers from the wall or attach

them to optional speaker stands.

See page 54, “Placing the Speakers (NX-P200)”.

Placing the Speakers

Place the speakers as shown in the diagram below.

• If the television (monitor) image is distorted, place the

speakers away from the television.

Front Speakers (L, R)

Place the Front Left and Right Speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from

each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center Speaker

Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of

your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as

possible (such as directly over or under the monitor) and

centrally between the front speakers.

Surround Speakers (L, R)

Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing

slightly inwards, approximately 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor.

Subwoofer

The position of the Subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass

sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the

Subwoofer near the Front Speakers. Turn it slightly toward the

center of the room to reduce wall reflections.

Press the h mark and slide off the back

cover.

Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R06,

UM-3) into the battery compartment.

Close the back cover.

Center Speaker

Front Speaker (L)

Front Speaker (R)

Surround Speaker (R)

1.8 m

(6 feet)

Surround

Speaker (L)

Subwoofer

Advice

Note

Check +/-

polarity

Press h

English

Preparation

002DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 1:07 PM7

Connecting the Speakers and TV

Connect the power cord after connecting the speakers and TV.Please ...

Connect the cable core with the

color band near the tip to the +

connector. Be careful, if you

reverse the cables, the sound

will be unnatural.

Cable

core

Color

band

Lever

1 Press the lever down.

2 Insert the speaker cable core

into the hole.

3 Release the lever and the

lever will snap back into place.

Speaker Cable (Red)

Connect the plug to the jack of the same color.

Insert it firmly.

Red, green, white: Face the tab upwards and insert.

Gray, blue: Face the tab downwards and insert.

Tab

Red

Green

White

Blue

Tab

Gray

Speaker Cable (Gray)

Surround Right

Speaker

Front Right Speaker

Please

• Do not allow the speaker cable cores to touch each other.

• Do not use excessive force when inserting plugs, connectors or jacks as they can be damaged.

Preparation

Please ...

003DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:10 AM8

VIDEO

S VIDEO

(

DVD ONLY

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(480p/480i)

(

DVD ONLY

)

MONITOR

OUT

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONT

SURROUND

FRONT

SURROUND

IN OUT

VIDEO 1 VCR VIDEO 2 MD/CD-R

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL

SUBWOOFER

OUT

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

SPEAKER IMPEDANCE: 6 MIN.

UNBAL

ANT

GND

ANT

OUTININOUTININ

VIDEO IN

VIDEO

INPUT

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

GND

ANT

Surround

Left

Speaker

Front Left

Speaker

Center Speaker

Speaker Cable (Green)

Speaker Cable (White)

Connect the

power cord after

making all other

connections.

Turn off the

TV before

connecting.

Video Pin Cable

DVD/Super Audio CD Receiver

Speaker

Cable

(Blue)

System

Control

Cable

Subwoofer

Cable

Connect to the S-video or

Y/P

B/PR jack on the TV.

Connect the

power cord

after making all

other

connections.

Use a commercially available S-video cable to

connect the S VIDEO MONITOR OUTPUT to

your TV’s S-video input.

Preparation

Subwoofer

Connecting with S-video

English

AV MONITOR OUT

(U. K. and Europe models only)

If your monitor has only one jack for

video input, you can use

CinemaStation’s SCART output jack

for connecting directly to the monitor.

This connection provides the best

picture quality. See page 96 when the

screen does not appear properly.

003DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:10 AM9

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

ABCDE

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

Basic Operations

Viewing a DVD

It’s time to play a DVD. Select a disc and begin from step 1.

Turn on the TV.

Use the TV remote control or

power switch.

Switch TV Input.

Use the TV remote control or the

input switch button on the

television.

For example, switch to video input

1 if CinemaStation is connected

to video input 1.

Press POWER.

CinemaStation turns on.

The CinemaStation Display lights

up.

Press f on the

CinemaStation.

The disc tray slides out.

004DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:10 AM10

Basic Operations

DVD/CD

CINEMA

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

English

Basic Operations

Place a disc in the tray.

• Place the disc with the label side

facing up.

• Hold the disc by its edge and hole in

the center to avoid touching the

surface of the disc.

Please ...

Press f on the

CinemaStation.

The disc tray slides in.

Press DVD/CD.

CinemaStation enters DVD/CD

mode.

004DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:10 AM11

Basic Operations

A B C D E

POWER

CHCH

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

SET MENU

ENTER

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

ON SCREEN MENU

SET MENU

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

ABCDE

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

Press p.

The DVD starts playing.

Press s to stop playback.

To change discs

Press f on CinemaStation to

eject the disc.

Set another disc in the tray and

press f.

Press POWER to turn off.

Eject the disc before turning off

the power.

After finished playing, press f on CinemaStation to

eject the disc. Then press f once more to close the

disc tray.

004DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:10 AM12

Basic Operations

Handy Features

CHCH

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

SET MENU

ENTER

CHCH

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

SET MENU

ENTER

CHCH

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

A-B

REPEAT

ON SCREEN MENU

RETURN

STATUS

SET MENU

ENTER

CINEMA

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

CHCH

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

A-B

REPEAT

ON SCREEN MENU

RETURN

STATUS

SET MENU

ENTER

English

Useful Features

Selecting the Audio Language

1 While holding down SHIFT,

press AUDIO.

2 While viewing the TV

screen, press h or g to

select the audio language

you want.

The audio language

changes each time you

press AUDIO while holding

down SHIFT.

Press ON SCREEN to turn

off the On Screen Menu.

This selection is available when the DVD disc

contains multi-language audio.

Selecting the Subtitle Language

1 While holding down SHIFT,

press SUBTITLE.

2 While viewing the TV

screen, press h or g to

select the subtitle lan-

guage you want. Select

“None” to turn off the

subtitle.

The subtitle language

changes each time you

press SUBTITLE while

holding down SHIFT.

Press ON SCREEN to turn

off the On Screen Menu.

This selection is available when the DVD disc

contains multi-language subtitles.

Moving Forward and Backward

To fast reverse: Press e.

To fast forward: Press r.

To move to the start of the currently playing or

previous chapter: Press t.

To move to the start of the next chapter: Press y.

Adjusting the Audio

Volume

Press + to increase the

volume and - to decrease.

Pausing Playback

Press d.

To resume playback press w.

1 ja

2 ja

3 en

Audio

2 ja

Sub-title

1 ja

3 en

004DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:10 AM13

1414

Basic Operations

Handy FeaturesHandy Features

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

CHCH

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

SET MENU

ENTER

Useful Features

Switching the Viewing Angle

While holding down SHIFT, press

ANGLE.

The video angle changes each

time you press ANGLE while

holding down SHIFT.

Restarting Playback from the Stop Position

(Memory Resume)

Pressing a during playback enables Memory Resume. CinemaStation

memorizes the stop position.

Pressing w starts playing back the disc from the stop position.

• You can change the angle with

h, g, or Number buttons,

instead of ANGLE.

Press ON SCREEN to turn off

the On Screen Menu.

Advice

Angle

This selection is available

when the DVD disc contains

multi-angle content.

004DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:11 AM14

Basic Operations

Try It Out!

CINEMA

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

English

Useful Features

Enhancing the Sound Presence

CinemaStation is loaded with a variety of DSP Programs, so you can

experience from the raw excitement of a rock concert to the breathtaking

space of a cinemagraphic spectacle.

See page 16, “Finding the Best DSP Effect”.

Turning off the

Sound

Press MUTE on the Remote

Control.

Press it again to turn on the

sound.

Controlling the

DVDs Your Children

Can View

You can set the Parental Control

level and lock discs.

See page 81, “Protecting Your

Children from Undesirable

Material”.

Enhancing Video Quality

CinemaStation uses progressive image playback (available only for NTSC Signal Output)

to render the full beauty of DVD video.

You can connect a television that has component video input jacks to CinemaStation’s

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and enjoy progressive scan imaging.

See page 80, “Enjoying High-Quality Video”.

Answers to Common Problems

I cannot change the audio

or subtitle language

The disc may have only one audio and

one subtitle language.

I followed each step correctly but the disc

doesn’t play.

Some discs have a Disc Menu or DVD Menu.

Your settings may change if you use this type of menu.

No subtitles appear

Check the disc jacket to make sure

subtitles are available.

004DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:11 AM15

• Experiment with different sound field effects until you find the DSP Program that you feel best

matches your source.

• CinemaStation has other DSP Programs not listed below. See page 65, “Selecting DSP Program

Effects”.

• CinemaStation cannot use any DSP Program when playing a Super Audio CD.

Sound Presence

Finding the Best DSP Effect

Changing the DSP effect based on listening and viewing content

Select a DSP Program for the movie or music and experience the sound of a

movie theater or concert hall. Follow the chart below to select the DSP

Program that offers the acoustic qualities you want.

Advice

What do you want to do? Next selection

Watch a movie

Watch live entertain-

ment

Listen to music

Watch a sports

broadcast

Play video games

An action-packed thriller

Romantic or comic drama

Popular science fiction with loads

of effects

Grand spectacle

Experience the digital surround

sound of a movie theater

Feel the excitement on the big stage

Classical concert

Live jazz

Rock Concert

Home party

Baseball and soccer

Feel the power and momentum of

the game

005DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:11 AM16

Sound Presence

Action

Drama

Sci-Fi

Spectacle

Theater

Music Video

Classic Hall

Jazz Club

Rock Concert

5ch Stereo

MOVIE

MUSIC

SPORTS

GAME

Finding the right DSP Program

Action

Enhances the stereoscopic effect for a thrilling sense of

presence only found in an action movie.

Drama

Expresses surround sounds softly so that voice and dialog are

clear and crisp.

Sci-Fi (Science Fiction)

Fills the space with music and sound that have an eerie sense of

reality.

Suitable for serious science fiction that has a good story line.

Spectacle

Expresses super-wide spaces. Suitable for movies that have a

powerful visual impact.

Theater

Preserves the power of Dolby or DTS Surround for experiencing

the rich acoustical presence of a movie theater.

Music Video

Magnifies the feeling of listening to live rock or jazz in a concert

hall. The screen image and sound field space stretch out to the

fullest, engulfing you in an atmosphere of excitement.

Classic Hall (The Munich Philharmonic Hall)

Puts you in a front row seat at the Munich Philharmonic Hall,

surrounded in calm, voluptuous sound.

Jazz Club (The Bottom Line)

Reproduces the acoustics of sitting right in front of the stage at

The Bottom Line, a popular New York City jazz club. Experience

the lively, realistic throb of a wide stage.

Rock Concert (The Roxy Theater)

Recreates the acoustic personality of a nightclub seating for an

audience of about 460.

5ch Stereo

Fills the space with sound and allows all listeners to enjoy the same

high-quality sound no matter where they are sitting or standing in the

room. A DSP Program that is especially suitable for home parties.

Live Sports

In a live stereo sports broadcast, announcer voices are central,

engulfed in the cheers and emotional whirl of the stadium.

Game

Gives TV games extra depth and surround. You can enjoy TV

games with monaural or stereo sound.

Selecting a DSP Program

Remote Control

Press MOVIE

repeatedly to

display DSP

Programs.

Remote Control

Press MUSIC

repeatedly to

display DSP

Programs.

Remote Control

Press SPORTS.

Remote Control

Press GAME.

English

Sound Presence

005DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:11 AM17

Advanced Features

Names and Functions of Parts

Top and Front

Buttons for amplifier and disc operations

Stops disc playback.

Pauses disc playback.

INPUT

Selects an input source. Press this

button until you find the source you

want to watch or listen to.

Selects an audio input signal. You

can set the priority level for the audio

input signals when the equipment is

connected to both OPTICAL IN jack

and AUDIO IN jack.

(See page 78.)

VOLUME

Adjusts the overall sound volume.

Turn right to increase the volume

and left to decrease the volume.

Disc tray

Receives your disc.

Display

Displays DSP Program names,

setting values and playback

information.

Starts disc playback.

DSP

Selects a DSP Program.

Press this button until you

find the DSP Program you

want. To select another

DSP Program group, hold

down this button.

See the diagram shown on

the left.

t/e, r/y

Selects the previous/next track or chapter.

Continue pressing to fast forward or fast reverse.

Opens and closes

the disc tray.

STANDBY/ON

Switches the unit between ON and STANDBY.

No audio will be heard for a few seconds after power is

switched on.

STANDBY mode uses a little energy to receive an

infrared signal from the Remote Control.

Remote Control Sensor

Receives signals from the Remote Control.

Action

Drama

Sci-Fi

Spectacle

Theater

Music Video

Classic Hall

Jazz Club

Rock Concert

5ch Stereo

Live Sports

Game

PL Normal

PL II Movie

PL II Music

STEREO

Holding down

DSP.

Press DSP.

DSP button operation

(phones) jack

Connects your headphones. When

selecting a DSP Program, you can

enjoy “SILENT CINEMA”. (See

page 70.)

PROGRESSIVE (NTSC only)

Switches DVD playback between progressive and

interlace outputs. (See page 80.)

006DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:12 AM18

Advanced Features

Buttons for tuner operations

Press INPUT on CinemaStation or press TUNER on the Remote Control to select Tuner mode. In Tuner mode, the buttons

below function as described.

About memory backup

If you disconnect the power cord from the outlet,

CinemaStation will memorize the settings listed to the

right for about a week.

Set them again if those settings are erased after a week.

• Volume

• Subwoofer, Center and Surround L/R Speakers output

levels (See page 59.)

• SET MENU options (See page 89.)

• Sleep Timer settings (See page 79.)

• Preset radio stations (See page 41.)

• DSP Program settings

Delay Time (See page 72.)

Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings (See page 68.)

A dvanced

Advanced Features

A/B/C/D/E

Selects preset groups (A, B, C, D, E) for FM/AM stations. (See page 41.)

d PRESET/TUNING u

Selects a Preset Number.

Searches a radio station. (See page 39.)

PRESET/BAND

Selects FM or AM tuning mode or Preset

mode. (See page 39.)

MEMORY

Stores received stations for

Preset Tuning.

(See page 41.)

AUTO/MAN’L

Switches between Auto Tuning and Manual Tuning

modes. (See pages 39 and 40.)

Press this button to set CinemaStation to Auto

Tuning mode (AUTO indicator lights up), or press

this button to set CinemaStation to Manual Tuning

mode (AUTO indicator goes out).

English

006DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:12 AM19

Advanced Features

CinemaStation Display

MATRIX

PCM

TITLE TRACK CHAP

VIRTUAL SILENT MULTI2CH REP

A-B

ALL AUTO ST

MEMORY

TUNEDPS

PTY RT

PTY

HOLD

PROGRESSIVE

DIGITAL

DVD VCD

888888888888

PL DSP

PROG SLEEP

MATRIX

PCM

TITLE TRACK CHAP

VIRTUAL SILENT MULTI2CH REP

A-B

ALL AUTO ST

MEMORY

TUNED

PROGRESSIVE

DIGITAL

DVD VCD

888888888888

PL DSP

PROG SLEEP

PTY RT

PTY

HOLD

PROGRESSIVE

Lights up when

PROGRESSIVE is activated.

Decoder indicator

Lights up when an internal

decoder is working.

DSP

Lights up when a DSP sound field

program is selected.

DSP Program

indicator

Lights up when a DSP

Program is selected.

VIRTUAL

Lights up when Virtual

Cinema DSP is enabled.

“SILENT CINEMA” indicator

Lights up when using a DSP Program

with headphones for “SILENT

CINEMA”.

SLEEP

Lights up when using

the Sleep Timer.

PCM

Lights up when playing

PCM signal such as CDs.

Program, Repeat indicator

PROG: Lights up during Program Play.

REP: Lights up during Repeat Play of a title, chapter or

track.

REP ALL: Lights up during Repeat Play for whole

disc.

REP A-B: Lights up during A-B Repeat.

Lights up when receiving a strong

FM radio signal in Auto Tuning or

Auto Preset mode.

Disc indicator

DVD: Lights up while a DVD disc is set in the disc tray.

VCD: Lights up while a VCD disc is set in the disc tray.

CD: Lights up while a music CD disc is set in the disc tray.

AUTO

Lights up when using Auto

Tuning or Auto Preset in

Tuning mode.

Stop (Pause)

indicator

Lights up when stopping or

pausing disc playback.

Title, Track, Chapter indicator

TITLE: Lights up when showing the title.

TRACK: Lights up when showing the track.

CHAP: Lights up when showing the chapter.

MEMORY

Blinks when

memorizing

(presetting) an FM/

AM radio station.

Playback indicator

Lights up during disc playback.

RDS indicator (U. K. and

Europe models only)

Lights up when receiving an RDS

signal. In PTY SEEK mode the

PTY HOLD indicator lights up.

TUNED

Lights up when

receiving an FM/AM

broadcast.

Main Display

Shows Input Source and DSP

Program names, Radio Station

Frequency, Preset Numbers and

other info. Shows chapter or

track number, elapsed time and

other info during disc playback.

MULTI, 2CH

MULTI: Lights up when playing

a multi-channel Super Audio CD.

2CH: Lights up when playing a

2-channel Super Audio CD.

006DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:12 AM20

Advanced Features

30° 30°

Remote Control Features

As shown on the left, CinemaStation is composed of three

main parts. Remote Control button operations change

depending on the mode, so it is possible to control all

Amplifier, DVD/CD and Tuner functions with a single

remote unit.

For example, in Amp mode the “3” button is used to select

Matrix 6.1, but in DVD/CD mode, it functions as a

numerical button that specifies time, track and other

numbers.

To switch modes, follow the steps below.

• Amp mode: Press AMP.

• DVD/CD mode: Press DVD/CD. See page 23, “DVD/CD

Mode Button Names and Functions”.

• Tuner mode: Press TUNER.

For details on Tuner operations, see page 39, “Listening

to the Radio”.

The Remote Control can also operate a television or VCR

connected to CinemaStation. However, it is first necessary

to enter the manufacturer code for the equipment in the

Remote Control’s memory. See page 84, “Storing

Manufacturer Codes in the Remote Control”.

Some reminders when using the Remote Control

• Do not spill water or tea, or drop anything on the unit.

• Do not leave the unit in the following places.

Near a stove, bath or hot and humid place.

In a dusty place.

In an extremely cold place.

When the batteries run down, replace them

When the batteries grow old, the effective operation distance

decreases considerably. When that happens, replace the batteries

with two new ones. Once you take the old batteries out, replace

them within two minutes to preserve the memory in the Remote

Control.

Use the Remote Control

within 6 m (20 feet) of the

CinemaStation and point it

toward the Remote Control

Sensor.

Using the Remote Control

• Replace worn out batteries as soon as possible.

• Do not use a new battery with one that has been used before.

• Do not use different types of batteries (for example, alkaline with manganese) together. Each type of battery has its own

characteristics.

• If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful not to let leaking battery acid come into contact with you or your

clothing. Before inserting new batteries wipe the compartment clean.

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT STEREOMATRIX 6.1

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

CINEMA

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

TUNER

AMP

DVD/CD

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

CENTER

SURR

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

Notes

CinemaStation

AMP

Decoder selection

SET MENU

DVD/CD

Playback

Subtitles, audio

language selection

FM/AM

Radio station

reception

Radio station

preset

Amp mode Tuner mode

“3” button

Within 6m

(20 feet)

English

DVD/CD mode

006DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:12 AM21

Advanced Features

Amp Mode Button Names and Functions

Press AMP before starting operations.

• The purple color on the Remote Control indicates Amp mode.

• Buttons with an asterisk (*) mark work even if you do not press AMP

before starting operations.

Advice

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

DSP Program buttons*

Selects one of four DSP Programs: MOVIE,

MUSIC, SPORTS or GAME. (See pages 16

and 17.)

The MOVIE and MUSIC groups contain

multiple sound field programs. Press the

button repeatedly and select the effect you

like.

VOLUME +/-*

Adjusts the overall volume level. Press + to

increase the volume and - to decrease the

volume.

TEST

Outputs a test tone. (See page 59.)

SET MENU

Enters the SET MENU. (See page 89.)

SLEEP*

Sets the Sleep Timer. (See page 79.)

Volume level buttons

Adjust speaker volume level. (See page 61.)

SW +/-: Adjusts the Subwoofer volume.

CENTER +/-: Adjusts the Center Speaker

volume.

SURR +/-: Adjusts the volume of the

Surround Speakers.

STEREO

Switches between normal stereo sound and

audio with a sound field effect. (See page 75.)

Select STEREO to listen to audio with no

sound field effect from the Front L/R Speakers.

MATRIX 6.1

Sets the Matrix 6.1 decoder. (See page 65.)

In most cases, the Matrix 6.1 decoder works

automatically once Dolby Digital Surround

EX or DTS ES discs start playing. However,

for some disc types, you may have to set the

decoder using this button.

q/DTS, SELECT

Switches between Dolby Digital and DTS decoders.

After pressing q/DTS, repeatedly press SELECT to

select a decoder. (See page 74.)

POWER (a/I)*

Switches the CinemaStation between ON and

STANDBY.

NIGHT

Sets the CinemaStation to Night Listening mode.

(See page 71.)

h, g, q, w

Adjusts the test tone and SET MENU.

MUTE*

Turns off the sound. Press again to return to the

previous sound volume.

This button works in every mode.

Input Selection buttons*

Selects a source to operate with the Remote Control.

(See pages 26 and 27.)

To operate a VCR, CD or MD recorder, you need to

set the manufacturer code for the VCR or MD/CD-R

button.

Infrared signal transmitter

Sends an infrared signal to the CinemaStation.

AMP

Puts the Remote Control in Amp mode.

Input Selection buttons

for U.K. and Europe

models are as shown.

CINEMA

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO

TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

U.K. and Europe models

006DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:12 AM22

Advanced Features

DVD/CD Mode Button Names and Functions

Press DVD/CD before starting operations.

• The green color on the Remote Control indicates DVD/CD mode.

Advice

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

S TATU S

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

STATUS

Shows type of disc, play/stop status, playing time

and other info.

DVD/CD

Puts the Remote Control in DVD/CD mode.

While holding down SHIFT, press one of the

following buttons to enable the corresponding

operation.

7→REPEAT: Enables Repeat Play.

8→A–B: Enables settings for A-B Repeat.

2→AUDIO: Switches the audio language of

the DVD video.

3→ANGLE: Switches the angle of the DVD

video.

4→SUBTITLE: Switches the subtitle

language of the DVD video.

s (Stop)

Stops disc playback.

e (Pause)

Pauses disc playback.

h (Play)

Starts disc playback.

Shows the Disc Menu on the TV.

RETURN

Returns the Disc Menu to one position before the

current screen.

h, g, q, w/ENTER

Adjusts On Screen Menu and other settings.

Number buttons (1-9, 0)

Input numerals for track numbers and others.

w, f

Fast forwards and reverses.

b, a (Skip)

Moves to the start of a disc track.

ON SCREEN

Shows the On Screen Menu on the TV.

(See pages 24 and 93.)

English

006DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:12 AM23

Advanced Features

Using the On Screen Menu

The On Screen Menu includes Preference, Toolbar and Setup. Perform

operations using the TV screen.

Preference: You can adjust picture contrast, sharpness and other picture

qualities of the DVD or video CD to your liking.

Toolbar: You can use Program Play, Disc Navigation and other handy

playback features.

Setup: You can adjust DVD playback controls such as the default subtitle

language and screen size.

Useful functions

Press ON SCREEN.

The On Screen Menu appears.

CINEMA

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

,, ,

SCREEN

Setting default subtitle and audio

languages

Program

View

Play Option

Toolbar

Preferences

Setup

Adjusting the picture quality such as

contrast or brightness

Setting the Status Display

Using Program Play

Using zoom and angle view

Selecting audio and subtitle

languages, and learning about the

disc structure

Finding a scene or track to view or

listen to

Using the Parental Control

Fine-tuning TV screen settings

Setting Playback Control

On Screen Menu

007DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:12 AM24

Advanced Features

Press h or g to

navigate the Main

Menus, then press w.

On Screen Menu

Press h or g to navigate

the Submenus, then

press w.

Press h, g, q or w to

select or set items.

Preference

Toolbar

Setup

Features

Picture

Program

View

Play Option

Access

Language

Features

Video shift

Saturation

Contrast

Color settings (Colour settings)

Brightness

Sharpness

Status window

Clear All

Tracks

Program

Play list (Playlist)

Zoom

Angle

Chapter Preview

Audio

Disc Navigation

Sub-title (Subtitle)

Frame by Frame

Fast

Time

Slow

Disc Lock

Parental level

Enter PIN

Change PIN

TV shape

TV System

Video Output*

Default Sub-title

(Default Subtitle)

Country

Menu Language

Default audio

PBC

English

*U.K. and Europe models only.

Digital output

Audio Menu

Refer to On Screen Menu Guide on pages 95 and 96.

007DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:13 AM25

Selecting the Media Device

Selecting the Equipment

CinemaStation provides you with a variety of playback options, including

video discs, music CDs and MP3 discs. You can connect a VCR or video

game console and increase your home entertainment possibilities. For

connecting the equipment you want, follow the chart below.

What would you like to play? Equipment you use

Video discs

Music CDs, MP3

discs or Super

Audio CDs

FM/AM radio

Video tape

Video game or

video camera

CinemaStation

VCR

CinemaStation

video game console or

video camera

Play

video

CDs

MDs

CinemaStation

CD or MD recorder

007DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:13 AM26

Selecting the Media Device

CINEMA

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

CINEMA

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

CINEMA

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

CINEMA

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

CINEMA

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2

VCR

MD/CD-R

DVD/CD

TUNER

Selecting the Media Device

Press DVD/CD on the

Remote Control.

To play a video disc, perform steps 1

to 10 on pages 10 to 12, “Viewing a

DVD”.

To play a music disc, perform steps 3

to 10 on pages 10 to 12, “Viewing a

DVD”.

Complete the steps on

pages 8 and 9,

“Connecting the

Speakers and TV”.

Complete the steps on

pages 8 and 9,

“Connecting the Speakers

and TV”. Then connect the

indoor FM Antenna and

AM Loop Antenna to

CinemaStation. See page

38, “Connecting the

Antennas”.

Complete the steps on

pages 8 and 9,

“Connecting the

Speakers and TV”. Then

connect a VCR to

CinemaStation. See page

46, “Connecting Video

Equipment”.

Complete the steps on

pages 8 and 9,

“Connecting the

Speakers and TV”. Then

connect a game console

or video camera to

CinemaStation. See page

46, “Connecting Video

Equipment”.

Press TUNER on

the Remote

Control.

To tune in your favorite channel,

see page 39, “Listening to the

Radio”.

Press VCR on the

Remote Control.

Press VIDEO 1 or

VIDEO 2 on the

Remote Control.

Making the connections Selecting the equipment

English

Complete the steps on

pages 8 and 9,

“Connecting the

Speakers and TV”. Then

connect a CD or MD

recorder to

CinemaStation. See page

50, “Connecting Audio

Equipment”.

Press MD/CD-R on

the Remote

Control.

• Press VIDEO for U.K. and Europe models.

Note

007DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:13 AM27

Playing Video and Music Discs

Playback Methods

CinemaStation provides you with a variety of playback methods, including

the ability to select and quickly find a scene or tune.

Start operations after first pressing DVD/CD. CinemaStation enters DVD/CD

mode to play a disc.

To skip chapters and tracks

To return to the previous chapter or track: Quickly

press t twice.

When you press t only once, playback starts from the

beginning of the currently playing chapter or track.

To advance to the next chapter or track: Press y.

To specify a track

Enter the track number with the Number buttons.

For a 1-digit number use buttons 1 to 9. For a 2-digit number,

use the buttons 1 to 9 for the second digit place, and buttons 1

to 9 and 0 for the first digit place.

For example:

To select track 17 press the 1 button followed by the 7

button.

To select track 20 press the 2 button followed by the 0

button.

Selecting a Scene or Tune

Number

buttons

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

VCD

Music CDDVD Video Video CD

In this manual, each type of disc has its own mark as shown below.

DVD-V

VCD

CINEMA

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

DVD/CD

Super Audio CD

SA-CD

Super Audio CD

There are different types of Super Audio CDs.

— 2-channel discs which contain stereo sound

— Multi-channel discs which contain multi-channel sound, up to 6 channels

— Hybrid discs which contain both stereo sound and multi-channel sound

CinemaStation can play Super Audio CDs with the same operation as music CDs, and

can reproduce high quality sound with a completely independent signal circuit for

playing Super Audio CDs. (See page 37.)

SA-CD

DVD-V

VCD

SA-CD

008DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:13 AM28

Playing Video and Music Discs

• You can also use the On Screen Menu to operate Frame Advance, Fast Forward/Reverse and Slow Advance/Reverse. In addition

to those, you can use Frame Reverse from the On Screen Menu.

See page 93, “Using the On Screen Menu”.

• The Skip feature may not work properly when using Playback Control on page 36 to play a video CD.

• If you use Fast Forward/Reverse while playing a Dolby Digital or DTS disc, the Speakers do not output any sound.

• Slow Reverse is not available for a video CD.

Frame Advance

Press d to pause playback.

Press d.

To return to normal play

Press w.

Slow Advance/Reverse

Press

to pause playback.

To return press e or to advance press r.

To Slow Reverse, press e. Each time you press the button,

the speed changes (- 1/8, -1/4 or –1/2). To Slow Advance,

press r. Each time you press the button, the speed

changes (1/8, 1/4 or 1/2).

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

Advice

Notes

English

VCD

DVD-V

VCD

To return to normal play

Press w.

To Fast Forward and Fast Reverse

Perform while playing.

To Fast Reverse: Press e.

Each time you press the button, the speed changes (D4✕, D8✕ or

D32✕).

To Fast Forward: Press r.

Each time you press the button, the speed changes (4✕, 8✕ or

32✕).

To pause playback

Press d while playing.

Press w to return to normal playback.

• D32✕ and 32✕ are not available for CD playback.

Note

VCD

DVD-V

VCD

SA-CD

008DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:14 AM29

Playing Video and Music Discs

Specify an elapsed time for playback

(Time Search)

Perform operations using the TV On Screen Menu.

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

ENTER

Press ON SCREEN.

Make sure that “Toolbar” is selected.

Press w to select “Play Option”.

Press g to select “Search”.

Press w to select “Time”.

Press w or q to select 0:00:00 (hour, minute or

second) with the cursor. Then enter time with the

Number buttons.

You can specify the time only within the current track or

title, not the whole disc.

Press ENTER, then press ON SCREEN to turn off

the On Screen Menu.

When pressing ENTER, playback starts from the time

position you specified in step 5.

Number

buttons

Program

View

Play Option

Toolbar

Preferences

Setup

Frame by Frame

Fast

Time

Slow

View

Play Option

0:00:28

Time

Frame by Frame

Fast

Slow

0:02:09

Time

Frame by Frame

Fast

Slow

Cursor

008DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:14 AM30

Playing Video and Music Discs

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

ENTER

Customizing Playback Order (Program Play)

Playback your favorite chapters and tracks in the order you

want.

Perform operations using the TV On Screen Menu.

Program

View

Play Option

Toolbar

Preferences

Setup

Clear all

Tracks

Program

Play list

Program

View

Play Option

T1 C1

Program

Tracks

Clear all

Play list

English

VCD

Press ON SCREEN.

Make sure that “Toolbar” is selected.

Press w, then repeatedly press h to select

“Program”.

Press w, then press h to select “Tracks”. Then

press w.

E.g. DVD video

E.g. CD

Tracks

Clear all

Program

Play list

DVD-V

SA-CD

008DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:14 AM31

Playing Video and Music Discs

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

ENTER

• Playback Control is not available during Program Play of a video CD.

Press q to return to the screen in step 3, and

press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen

Menu.

Program Play starts. Press w to start Program Play when

Program Play does not start.

Advice

Note

• Once Program Play is set, the PROG indicator lights up in the

CinemaStation Display.

Chapter 1

Title 1

Title 9

Title 10

Title 2

Title 3

Select the chapter or track to add to Program

Play.

E.g. DVD video

Press h or g to select the title number to add,

then press ENTER.

Perform step 4 until you add all desired chapters

or tracks.

➡

Press h or g to select the chapter number to

add, then press ENTER.

Chapter 1

Title 1

Title 9

Title 10

Title 2

Title 3

E.g. CD

Press h or g to select the track number to add,

then press ENTER.

Track 2

Track 14

Track 1

Track 3

Track 4

008DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:14 AM32

Playing Video and Music Discs

CHCH

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

CHCH

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

Check Program Play content

Delete Program Play

Perform steps 1 to 2 in “Customizing Playback

Order (Program Play)” on page 31.

Press w, then press g to select “Play list”

(“Playlist”). Then press w.

The list appears in the specified order.

Press h or g to scroll through the list.

Perform steps 1 to 2 in “Customizing Playback

Order (Program Play)” on page 31.

Press w, then press h to select “Clear All”. Then

press w.

“Clear” changes to “Cleared”, and all Program Play

content is deleted.

English

CHCH

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

Turn on/off Program Play

Perform steps 1 to 2 in “Customizing Playback

Order (Program Play)” on page 31.

Press w to select “Program”. Then press w.

Press h or g to select “On” or “Off”.

CinemaStation automatically sets Program menu item to

“On” after Program Play starts. The setting does not

change even if Program Play finishes, so you can restart

Program Play by pressing w.

To return to normal playback, select “Off” for Program

menu item in the On Screen Menu. Even if you set it to

“Off”, the playlist remains in the memory, so you can use

the previous play list by setting it to “On”.

008DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:14 AM33

Playing Video and Music Discs

You can repeat a favorite track, chapter or entire disc. You

can also repeat certain parts you specified as many times

as you like.

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SHIFT

REPEAT

• Once Repeat Play is selected, the Repeat mode indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display.

— REP indicates title, chapter and track repeat

— REP ALL indicates entire disc repeat

• Repeat Play may not work properly with some DVD video discs.

• Repeat Play will not work during Menu Play of a video CD that is using Playback Control.

Repeating a Disc or Track (Repeat Play)

DVD-V

VCD

Play back a disc.

To repeat a chapter or track first start playing it. See page

28, “Selecting a Scene or Tune”.

While holding down SHIFT, press REPEAT to

select Repeat mode.

Every time you press the button, the display on the TV

screen changes as shown below.

Advice

Notes

Off (Normal playback)

Repeat (Repeat Play for currently playing chapter)

Disc (Repeat Play for currently playing disc)

Title (Repeat Play for currently playing title)

Off (Normal playback)

Repeat (Repeat Play for currently playing track)

Disc (Repeat Play for currently playing disc)

DVD video

Video CD/CD

SA-CD

Off (Normal playback)

Repeat (Repeat Play for currently playing track)

Area (Repeat Play for currently playing Area)

009DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:14 AM34

Playing Video and Music Discs

English

• A-B Repeat may not work properly with some DVD video discs.

• You can use A-B Repeat only within one track or title.

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

S TATU S

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SHIFT

A-B

Repeat between two points (A-B Repeat)

DVD-V

VCD

Specify the start and end of a favorite segment (points A

and B) then playback between those two points as much

as you like. You can specify a part within one title or track.

Play back a disc.

While holding down SHIFT at the start position

(point A), press A-B.

“

Repeat A” appears on the TV screen.

• The REP A- indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display.

While holding down SHIFT at the end position

(point B), press A-B.

“

A/B” appears on the TV screen. A-B Repeat starts.

Advice

Notes

• The REP A-B indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display.

To return to normal playback

While holding down SHIFT, press A-B.

“

A/B Off” appears on the TV screen, and A-B Repeat

cancels.

SA-CD

009DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:15 AM35

Playing Video and Music Discs

Many DVDs or video CDs that have Playback Control

include an original menu. You can use the menu for

skipping to a favorite title or chapter and switching audio or

subtitle language.

CINEMA

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

CHCH

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

VOLUME

SET MENU

ENTER

RETURN

• Playback Control is not available during Program Play.

Using a Disc Menu

Navigate a DVD Disc Menu

Use Video CD Playback Control (PBC) (Menu Play)

Press MENU.

A menu appears on the TV screen.

• Depending on the disc, a menu may automatically pop up when

playback starts.

Advice

Select items with h, g, q, w and press ENTER.

If operating instructions appear in the menu, follow them

and repeat step 2.

If you play a video CD that includes Playback Control, a menu

will appear on the TV screen. From the menu you can select the

scenes and information that interest you. In this manual, using

the menu screen to play media is called Video CD Menu Play.

Number buttons: For selecting the desired item.

RETURN: For returning to the previous screen.

y: For moving to the next screen.

t: For returning to the previous screen.

Note

Number

buttons

Using a Disc Menu

009DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:15 AM36

Playing Video and Music Discs

English

Playing a Super Audio CD

Using the TV screen, selected area and

tracks of the Super Audio CD can be

played back.

Turn on the TV and switch the input

source to this unit.

Insert the disc. (The track display

screen of the Multi-channel appears.)

Press j to display the area selection

screen.

Stereo

Multi-channel

CD-DA

Select Multi-channel, Stereo or CD-DA

area using h and g and press w.

E.g.

When the disc contains Multi-channel,

Stereo and CD-DA areas.

• Area can be selected only when the Super Audio

CD is stopped.

• When “Multi-channel” or “Stereo” is selected,

output is only from the speakers. (Only the sound

from the front channel is output from the

headphones.)

Select a track using h and g, and press

ENTER to start playback.

Notes

You can play MP3 music that was recorded onto a CD-R

or CD-RW by a computer.

If you use the CinemaStation to playback MP3 discs recorded on

a computer, each folder on the disc is designated an “Album”,

and each file in each folder a “Track”.

• CinemaStation is compatible with a bit rate range of 32, 64, 96, 128,

192 or 256 kbps. CinemaStation is also compatible with variable bit

rate encoded MP3 files.

• CinemaStation is compatible with a sampling frequency of 32, 44.1 or

48 kHz.

Repeat Play

You can use Track Repeat and Album Repeat to repeat your

favorite track and disc. See page 34, “Repeating a Disc or

Track (Repeat Play)”.

Program Play

You can playback your favorite tracks in the order you want. See

page 31, “Customizing Playback Order (Program Play)”.

Playback status on the TV screen

You can check the playback status (e.g. disc type) along with the

total and elapsed playing time of the current track on the TV

screen.

• Depending on the way you assign folder or file names when you record the MP3 disc, the CinemaStation may play tracks in a

different order from the order they were recorded in.

• Depending on recording conditions, some discs cannot be played back.

Advice

Notes

Root

: Album

(Folder)

: Track

(File)

MP3 Playback Features

009DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:15 AM37

Listening to the Radio

Connecting the Antennas

CinemaStation includes an AM Loop Antenna and indoor FM Antenna. Use

the supplied antennas in areas with good radio wave reception. Connect

each antenna into its jack properly.

COMPONENT VIDEO

(480p/480i)

(

DVD ONLY

)

MONITOR

OUT

IN OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL

SUBWOOFER

OUT

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

UNBAL

ANT

GND

ANT

• The AM Loop Antenna can be detached from its stand and attached to a wall.

• To improve reception, we recommend that you install an outdoor antenna. For details, contact your local Yamaha sound products

service center.

• Install the supplied indoor FM Antenna and AM Loop Antenna away from this system.

• Even if you connect an outdoor AM antenna, be sure to still use the AM Loop Antenna.

Attach the Antenna to its stand.

Open the AM ANT and GND jack levers to

the right. Insert the AM Loop Antenna’s

cord cores into the AM ANT and GND

jacks.

Close the lever to fasten the cord.

Pull the cord lightly to make sure it is properly

fastened.

Adjust the Antenna left and right and find

the best position for reception.

Cord Core

Lever

Connecting the FM Antenna

Connect the supplied indoor FM Antenna to the FM

ANT jack.

When connecting an outdoor FM

antenna

Use the antenna’s coaxial cable and a commercially

available F-type connector to connect the antenna to the FM

ANT jack. For details, ask the shop where you bought the

outdoor antenna.

Earth (GND jack)

The GND jack does not provide secure grounding. However when there

is a lot of noise, connecting it may improve reception. To ground

CinemaStation, connect one end of a vinyl coated wire to the GND jack

and the other end to a commercially available grounding rod or copper

sheet, and bury the rod or sheet in damp earth.

Connecting the AM Loop Antenna

Advice

Notes

Indoor FM Antenna

(supplied)

AM Loop

Antenna

(supplied)

White

Black

AM ANT jack

GND jack

010DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:16 AM38

Listening to the Radio

English

Listening to the Radio

CinemaStation provides several methods for tuning radio stations to help you

find channels as easy as you can.

INPUT

Press PRESET/BAND to select either FM or AM.

Each time you press, the mode changes in the order as

follows: FM (Tuning mode) → AM (Tuning mode) →

(Preset mode) → FM (Tuning mode) → ...

PRESET/BAND

AUTO/MAN’L

d PRESET/TUNING

PRESET/TUNING u

Selecting the Radio Tuner

Press INPUT repeatedly on CinemaStation until TUNER

appears. The input source changes to Tuner (Radio) and

you can listen to AM/FM broadcasts.

• You can also press TUNER on the Remote Control to change the input

source to Tuner.

Advice

Display

Selecting Radio Stations

You have two ways to select radio stations, Auto Tuning

and Manual Tuning. Auto Tuning is quick and handy to use

when radio signal reception is strong.

Select stations automatically (Auto Tuning)

• If the colon (:) beside the Band indicator goes out, that means

CinemaStation is in Tuning mode. Make sure the colon (:) is not lit

up.

Advice

Press AUTO/MAN’L to set CinemaStation to Auto

Tuning mode.

When CinemaStation is set to Auto Tuning mode, the

AUTO indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display.

Press PRESET/TUNING u/d to select the radio

station you want to receive.

Press u to search for high-frequency stations or press d

to search for low-frequency stations.

Display

Preset number Band

Preset

group

Colon* Frequency

* Goes out in Tuning mode, lights up in Preset mode.

010DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:16 AM39

Listening to the Radio

PRESET/BAND

AUTO/MAN’L

d PRESET/TUNING

PRESET/TUNING u

For stations with weak radio signals, tune manually.

• If the radio waves are weak and Auto Tuning doesn’t work, tune manually (Manual Tuning).

• When Auto Tuning finds a radio station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency appears.

• Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality.

Select your favorite stations by hand (Manual Tuning)

Perform step 1 in “Select stations automatically

(Auto Tuning)” on page 39.

Press AUTO/MAN’L to set CinemaStation to

Manual Tuning mode.

When CinemaStation is set to Manual Tuning mode, the

AUTO indicator goes out from the CinemaStation

Display.

Press PRESET/TUNING u/d to select the radio

station you want to receive.

Hold down the button to continue the tuning search.

Advice

Display

010DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:16 AM40

Listening to the Radio

English

Up to 40 stations (5 Groups ✕ 8 Stations) can be automatically

preset.

PRESET/BANDA/B/C/D/E

MEMORY

AUTO/MAN’L

PRESET/TUNING u

d PRESET/TUNING

Setting Channels in Advance (Preset)

Presetting radio stations in memory helps you tune the

preset radio stations using a few simple button operations.

Automatically preset FM stations in advance (Auto Preset)

Press PRESET/BAND to select FM.

Press AUTO/MAN’L to make the AUTO indicator

light up.

Keep pressing MEMORY down for about 3

seconds.

The Preset Number, MEMORY and AUTO indicators

blink. After a few seconds, Auto Preset starts at the

frequency currently displayed toward the higher

frequency.

When Auto Preset finishes the frequency of the last radio

station memorized appears.

Customizing Auto Preset method

You can specify the Preset Group or number to start

tuning. You can also start Auto Tuning at the frequency

currently displayed toward either the lower or higher

frequency.

Perform steps 1 and 2 above, in “Automatically

preset FM stations in advance (Auto Preset)”.

Press MEMORY for about 3 seconds, then press

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u/d to select

the Preset Number you want to memorize first.

Auto Preset will stop when the number memorized

reaches 40 radio stations.

Press PRESET/BAND to turn off the colon (:),

then press PRESET/TUNING u/d.

When pressing d, Auto Preset starts at the frequency

currently displayed toward the lower frequency, and when

pressing u, Auto Preset starts at the frequency currently

displayed toward the higher frequency.

Display

010DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:16 AM41

Listening to the Radio

You can manually preset up to 40 radio stations.

A/B/C/D/EMEMORY

PRESET/TUNING u

d PRESET/TUNING

• When presetting a radio station, you can set the frequency and reception mode (stereo/monaural) at the same time.

• You can change the order of preset FM radio stations later. See page 43, “Changing the Order of Preset Stations”.

• If the number of radio stations that have been preset is less than 40, Auto Preset automatically stops after searching the whole

frequency range.

• If a new radio station is preset for a Preset Number, the previously preset station for the Preset Number is deleted.

• In Auto Preset, only FM radio stations with a strong signal are set. To preset radio stations with a weak signal set reception mode

to monaural and preset manually.

Manually preset stations in advance (Manual Preset)

Select radio stations you want to preset.

See page 39, “Selecting Radio Stations”.

The frequency and broadcast band (FM or AM) of the

tuned-in station appear in the CinemaStation Display.

Press MEMORY.

The MEMORY indicator blinks for about 5 seconds in the

CinemaStation Display, which means CinemaStation is

ready to preset.

While the MEMORY indicator is blinking, press

A/B/C/D/E to select the Preset Group (A to E).

The Group appears. Check that the colon (:) beside the

band indicator lights up.

While the MEMORY indicator is blinking, press

PRESET/TUNING u/d to select a Preset Number

(1 to 8).

Press u for a larger number and d for a smaller number.

While the MEMORY indicator is blinking, press

MEMORY.

The selected Preset Group and Number, broadcast band

(FM or AM) and frequency appear in the CinemaStation

Display.

Repeat steps 1 to 5 to manually preset other

radio stations.

Advice

Notes

Display

010DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:16 AM42

Listening to the Radio

English

You can tune in a radio station simply by selecting its

Preset Number.

Start operations after first pressing TUNER.

CHCH

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET

TUNER

PRESET/TUNING u

PRESET/BAND

d PRESET/TUNING

Selecting a Preset Station (Preset Tuning)

Changing the Order of Preset Stations

Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the

station’s Preset Group.

The Preset Group that appears in the CinemaStation

Display changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E.

Press PRESET u/d to select the Preset Number.

The Preset Group and Number, broadcast band (FM or

AM) and frequency appear in the CinemaStation Display

with the TUNED indicator lit up.

• You can also perform Preset Tuning by repeatedly pressing A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING u/d on CinemaStation.

Advice

You can also change the order of preset stations.

Below is an example of the steps for switching the E1 and

A5 radio stations.

Tune in the radio station preset to E1.

Review the procedure above, “Selecting a Preset Station

(Preset Tuning)”.

Press PRESET/BAND for about 3 seconds.

E1 and the MEMORY indicator will blink in the

CinemaStation Display.

Tune in the radio station preset to A5 using A/B/

C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u/d.

A5 and the MEMORY indicator will blink in the

CinemaStation Display.

Press PRESET/BAND.

“EDIT E1-A5” will appear in the CinemaStation Display

and the preset stations will exchange places.

010DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:16 AM43

Listening to the Radio

CHCH

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200RDS WB56630

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

SET MENU

ENTER

MODE START

PTY SEEK

FREQ/RDS

u PRESET

PTY SEEK

START

PRESET d

FREQ/RDS

PTY SEEK

MODE

Receiving RDS Stations (U.K. and Europe models only)

RDS (Radio Data System) is a transmission system for

FM stations used in many countries.

RDS transmissions contain various types of information,

including PS (Program Service), PTY (Program Type),

RT (Radio Text), and CT (Clock Time). RDS works

through cooperation among broadcasting stations.

FREQ/RDS

Press this button when receiving an RDS station to switch

between frequency and RDS mode. The RDS mode

display may include PS, PTY, RT and CT, depending on

the information a radio station provides.

PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the program type to search for.

PTY SEEK START

Once the program type has been selected in PTY SEEK

mode, press this button to begin the search.

PTY (Program Type)

RDS Modes

RDS supports four types of information: PS, PTY,

RT and CT.

PS (Program Service)

Shows the name of the RDS station broadcasting.

PTY (Program Type)

Divides RDS broadcasts into the 15 genres shown

at right.

RT (Radio Text)

Shows RDS broadcast information (including song

title, artist name) using up to 64 letters and numbers

plus the umlaut letter. If the radio text contains

other characters, they will appear with an underbar.

CT (Clock Time)

Shows the current time updated once a minute. If

data flow is interrupted, CT WAIT will appear.

NEWS

AFFAIRS

INFO

SPORT

EDUCATE

DRAMA

CULTURE

SCIENCE

VARIED

POP M

ROCK M

M.O.R. M

LIGHT M

CLASSICS

OTHER M

News

Current Affairs

General Information

Sports

Education

Drama

Culture

Science

Light Entertainment

Pops

Rock

Middle-Of-the-Road Music (easy-listening)

Light Classics

Serious Classics

Other Music

U.K. and Europe models

011DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:17 AM44

Listening to the Radio

English

Change RDS Mode

There are four RDS display modes. When an RDS

station is broadcasting, PS, PTY, RT or CT mode

indicators corresponding to the services provided

light up in the CinemaStation Display. Press

FREQ/RDS repeatedly to change among the

modes supported by the currently tuned RDS

station.

Notes

• When an RDS station is broadcasting, do not press FREQ/RDS until

one or more mode indicators light up in the CinemaStation Display. If

you press FREQ/RDS before the mode indicators light up,

CinemaStation may not be able to change modes.

• RDS information not provided by a station cannot be selected.

• If the RDS station’s signal transmission is too weak, CinemaStation

may not be able to use the service fully. In particular, radio text uses a

lot of bandwidth, so it may not be available even when other modes

are selectable.

• RDS information may not transmit under poor conditions. In this

case, press AUTO/MAN’L to set CinemaStation to Manual Tuning

mode. This changes reception to monaural and may help RDS

information reappear when you switch to RDS display mode.

• If outside interference disrupts an RDS station broadcast, RDS

information may suddenly disappear and “...WAIT ” appears in the

CinemaStation Display.

About PTY SEEK

Press PTY SEEK MODE to set CinemaStation to

PTY SEEK mode.

The program type of the tuned in station or NEWS blinks

in the CinemaStation Display.

Press PTY SEEK START to start searching all

preset RDS stations.

The selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD

indicator lights up while the search is in progress.

If the search finds a station that matches the program type

you selected, CinemaStation will tune it in.

If the station tuned in is not the one you want press PTY

SEEK START again to continue the search for other

stations broadcasting the program type you selected.

Press PRESET u/d to select the program type

you want.

Your program type selection appears in the

CinemaStation Display.

When you select the program type, CinemaStation automatically

searches through all preset stations currently broadcasting for

that type.

To cancel steps 1 or 2

Press PTY SEEK MODE twice.

PTY

RDS mode OFF

011DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:17 AM45

Using Other Equipment

Connecting Video Equipment

Connect a VCR to CinemaStation to play or dub videos. You can also

connect a game console or video camera.

Connecting a Game Console or VCR

•

Always read the owner’s manual of any equipment you want to connect.

VIDEO

S VIDEO

(

DVD ONLY

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(480p/480i)

(

DVD ONLY

)

MONITOR

OUT

IN OUT

VIDEO 1 VCR VIDEO 2 MD/CD-R

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL

SUBWOOFER

OUT

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

UNBAL

ANT

GND

ANT

OUTININOUTININ

VIDEO

DIGITAL

OPTICAL

OUTPUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO

AUDIO

VIDEO

INPUT OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 INPUT1 INPUT2

Please...

Connection Cables

VCR

Game console or

video camera

CinemaStation

Use a commercially available Audio/Video cable.

Use the supplied Video Pin Cable.

Audio/Video cable

(commercially available)

Video Pin Cable (supplied)

When directly

connecting the TV

with the VCR, you can

play video tape on the

VCR even if you turn

off CinemaStation.

Use a commercially available optical cable

Optical cable (commercially available)

The cable can be connected to either a VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 jack.

(Only VIDEO jacks are available on U.K. and Europe models.)

011DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:17 AM46

Using Other Equipment

English

Use a commercially available audio cable.

CinemaStation

OUTPUT

AUDIO

VIDEO

VIDEO 1 VCR VIDEO 2

INOUTININ

Notes on the audio jacks

• You cannot simultaneously use both IN and OUT jacks when

the jack names are the same as each other. For example, the

signal input from the VCR IN jack does not output from the

VCR OUT jack.

• CinemaStation’s digital and analog signal circuits are

independent of each other, so analog input signals can only

output from analog output jacks and digital input signals can

only output from digital output jacks.

Notes on recording and playing video

• Perform a test recording before recording.

• Do not press ON SCREEN during recording a DVD video.

If you press ON SCREEN, the On Screen Menu appears,

and both the video and On Screen Menu will be recorded.

• It is not possible to record DSP effects.

• When you turn off the connected VCR power, playback sound

may become distorted and the volume reduced. In this case,

turn on the VCR power.

• Even if you adjust the audio volume, audio quality, or change

the DSP Program during a video recording, it has no effect on

the recorded sound.

• Video recordings that you make cannot be used for any

purpose other than private enjoyment without the consent of

the copyright holder.

• You cannot record from a copy protected DVD disc.

Connect a game console to a digital input

If your game console has a digital output jack (optical), it can be

connected to CinemaStation’s OPTICAL IN jack.

See page 50, “Connecting Audio Equipment” to learn how

to connect an optical jack.

Connect the video output to CinemaStation’s VIDEO 1 IN or

VIDEO 2 IN jack. (“VIDEO” IN jack on U.K. and Europe

models)

Connect a TV to an audio input

Enjoy TV sound with CinemaStation by connecting the TV

audio output jack to the audio IN jacks of VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2

(“VIDEO” IN jack on U.K. and Europe models). Press VIDEO 1

or VIDEO 2 on the Remote Control to input TV sound.

Note

• Press VIDEO for U.K. and Europe models.

011DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:17 AM47

Using Other Equipment

Operating a VCR

For VCR operations, read your VCR owner’s manual.

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

CINEMA

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

POWER

VCR

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

CINEMA

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

POWER

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2

Advice

• The Remote Control can also operate a television or VCR connected

to CinemaStation. However, it is first necessary to enter the

manufacturer code for the equipment in the Remote Control’s

memory. See page 84, “Storing Manufacturer Codes in the

Remote Control”.

Operate your VCR.

Turn on the TV.

Turn on the VCR.

Switch the TV input.

For example, switch to video 1 if CinemaStation is

connected to video input 1 on the television.

Press POWER to turn on CinemaStation.

Press VCR.

CinemaStation can now output the VCR signal.

Playing a Video Game or Operating a Video Camera

For game console and video camera operations, read their

respective owner’s manuals.

Play your game console or video camera.

Press VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 according to the jacks

connected to the game console or video camera.

CinemaStation can now output video signals (game

console or video camera).

Press POWER to turn on CinemaStation.

Switch the TV input.

For example, switch to video 1 if CinemaStation is

connected to video input 1 on the television.

Turn on a game console or video camera.

Turn on the TV.

Note

• Press VIDEO for U.K. and Europe models.

011DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:17 AM48

Using Other Equipment

English

Dubbing from a Video Camera to a VCR

For video camera and VCR operations, be sure to read

their respective owner’s manuals.

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

CINEMA

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

POWER

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2

Turn on the TV.

Start playback on the video camera, then start

recording with the VCR.

Prepare to record with the VCR.

For example, switch the VCR input to external.

Press VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 according to the jacks

connected to the video camera.

CinemaStation can now input video signal (video

camera).

Press POWER to turn on CinemaStation.

Switch the TV input.

For example, switch to video 1 if CinemaStation is

connected to video input 1 on the television.

Turn on the video camera and VCR.

CinemaStation

VCR

Note

• If you play a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be

disturbed due to those signals.

Connecting with SCART cable (U.K. and Europe models only)

Do not connect CinemaStation to a monitor via a VCR. The copyright protection

technology incorporated in CinemaStation may not allow the video to play.

Note

• Press VIDEO for U.K. and Europe models.

011DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:17 AM49

Using Other Equipment

Connecting Audio Equipment

You can connect a CD recorder or MD recorder to CinemaStation to record

audio played on CinemaStation.

Connecting a CD or MD Recorder

YPB PR

S VIDEO

(

DVD ONLY

)

COMPONENT VIDEO

(480p/480i)

(

DVD ONLY

)

MONITOR

OUT

IN OUT

IDEO 2 MD/CD-R

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL

SUBWOOFER

OUT

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

UNBAL

ANT

GND

ANT

OUTININ

OUTPUT

OPTICAL

INPUT

OUTPUT

Please...

• For equipment connection, read the owner's manual of the equipment

you want to connect.

Anti-dust cap

When connecting an optical cable, first

remove the dust cap attached to the

OPTICAL jack. Store the cap in a safe

place and re-attach it when the jack is

not in use to prevent the jack from

collecting dust.

Connection Cables

CD recorder or

MD recorder

CinemaStation

Use a commercially available Optical Cable

Optical Cable (commercially available)

Anti-Dust Cap

Use a commercially available Audio Pin Cable.

Audio Pin Cable (commercially available)

You can connect a CD or MD

recorder to MD/CD-R jacks,

OPTICAL jacks or both.

011DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:17 AM50

Using Other Equipment

English

• CinemaStation cannot output a signal to the MD/CD-R OUT

jacks even when receiving a signal from the MD/CD-R IN

jacks.

• CinemaStation’s digital and analog signal circuits are

independent of each other, so analog input signals can only

output from analog output jacks and digital input signals can

only output from digital output jacks.

• CinemaStation’s optical digital jack is designed based on EIA

standards. If you use an optical cable that does not meet EIA

standards, it may not function properly.

• The digital jacks are compatible with PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS signals.

• The OPTICAL IN jack is compatible with a digital signal that

has a 96 kHz or less sampling frequency.

• Press MD/CD-R to operate your CD or MD recorder. When

connecting the CD or MD recorder to both MD/CD-R jacks

and OPTICAL jacks and “* Input Mode” is set to “AUTO”,

the OPTICAL jacks have priority over the MD/CD-R jacks.

See page 78, “Switching Input Modes”.

• Use “* Input Assign” in the SET MENU to assign the

OPTICAL IN jack to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2 (“VIDEO” on U.K.

and Europe models), VCR or MD/CD-R. The default setting is

MD/CD-R.

For example, when connecting your game console to the

OPTICAL IN jack, assign the OPTICAL IN jack to VIDEO 1,

and press VIDEO 1 to start operating the game console.

Notes for setting the OPTICAL IN jack and the

OPTICAL output signal

Set to MD/CD-R (default setting)

CinemaStation cannot output a signal to the OPTICAL OUT

jack even when inputting a signal from the OPTICAL IN jack.

Set to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2 or VCR

CinemaStation outputs a signal to the OPTICAL OUT jack

when inputting a signal from the OPTICAL IN jack.

Notes on the digital audio jacks

For details about assigning OPTICAL IN jacks see page 89,

“Using the SET MENU”.

CINEMA

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

VIDEO 1

MD/CD-R

Notes

• U.K. and Europe models only have VIDEO instead of

VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2.

• VIDEO is used as VIDEO 1 in above models.

011DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:17 AM51

Using Other Equipment

• Perform a test recording before recording.

• It is not possible to record DSP effects.

• CinemaStation cannot output a Super Audio CD signal to the

OPTICAL OUT jack. To record a Super Audio CD signal,

connect external devices (such as CD or MD recorder) to the

analog output jacks and use it to record the signal.

• When you turn off the connected CD recorder or MD recorder

power, playback sound may become distorted and the volume

reduced. In this case, turn on the CD recorder or MD recorder

power.

• Even if you adjust the audio volume, audio quality, or change

the DSP Program during a video recording, it has no effect on

the recorded sound. However, in DVD/CD mode, the output

sound for recording may cut off if any of the operations below

are performed. Do not perform any of the below during

recording.

— Output a test tone.

— Change a DSP Program

— Connect/disconnect the headphones

• CinemaStation can output a signal from the DIGITAL IN jack

to the DIGITAL OUT jack. The signal input from the

DIGITAL IN jack cannot output from the analog output jacks,

and the signal input from the analog input jacks cannot output

from the DIGITAL OUT jacks.

• Do not use audio recordings that you make for any purpose

other than private enjoyment without the consent of the

Timer Playback/Recording

Combined with a commercially available audio timer, you can

perform Timer Playback and Timer Recordings.

Operations vary depending on the equipment and audio timer

used, so be sure to read the relevant equipment owner’s manual.

Notes on recording and playing audio

011DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:17 AM52

Using Other Equipment

English

• When using Timer Playback/Recording, even if CinemaStation is in standby mode, the memory content (e.g. input source, AM/

FM frequency) is retained and used.

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

CINEMA

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

POWER

Turn on the CD recorder or MD recorder power

and get ready for recording.

Recording Audio from CinemaStation

Start recording with the CD recorder or MD

recorder.

Switch CinemaStation input to the source you

want and start playback.

E.g. To play a CD: First press DVD/CD then play the CD.

Press POWER to turn on CinemaStation.

Input

Selection

buttons

Notes

• Even if you use DTS software to digitally record a DTS signal only noise will be recorded.

• CinemaStation cannot output a Super Audio CD signal to the digital jack.

• If you want to perform Timer Recording without hearing sound, turn the volume down before starting Timer Recording.

Advice

Playing a CD or MD

CINEMA

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

MD/CD-R

Read the owner’s manual of the equipment you want to

operate before using it.

Advice

• The Remote Control can operate a CD or MD recorder connected to

CinemaStation. However, it is first necessary to enter the

manufacturer code for the equipment in the Remote Control’s

memory. See page 84, “Storing Manufacturer Codes in the

Remote Control”.

Turn on the CD recorder or MD recorder.

Start playback on the CD or MD recorder.

Press MD/CD-R.

CinemaStation can now output audio signals received

from a CD or MD recorder.

Press POWER to turn on CinemaStation.

011DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:17 AM53

Creating the Best Listening Space

Placing the Speakers (NX-P200)

Make sure the top of the television is level. If the top of the

television is not level, place the Center Speaker inside the

TV rack or directly on the floor. In any case, make sure it is

placed on a level surface.

When placing on top of the television, use the supplied

fastener (two pieces) as shown in the picture on the left,

between the bottom of the Center Speaker and top of the

television to fasten.

• Do not place on a television with top narrower than the bottom of the

speaker. You may get injured if the speaker falls over.

• Do not place if the top of the television is slanting. You may get

injured if the speaker falls over.

• After peeling off the fastener seal, do not touch the bonding surface. If

you do, the bonding surface weakens, which later may cause the

speaker to fall over.

• Before attaching the fastener to the television, wipe the TV top clean.

If the surface is dirty or wet tape will lose bonding strength, which

later may cause the speaker to fall over.

Placing the Center Speaker

Placing the Subwoofer

Place the Subwoofer on a level hard floor.

Use non-skid pads on the bottom of the Subwoofer in the

four corners as shown in the picture. This will prevent the

Subwoofer from sliding when it vibrates and increase

stability, preventing degradation of sound.

To get the most out of the sound field effects you need to place the speakers

in the best positions. To guard against poor acoustics like sound blur make

sure the speakers are stable. Also read page 7, “Preparing the Speakers”.

Notes

Fastener

Peel off

the seal

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM54

Creating the Best Listening Space

English

• One speaker weighs about 1.0 kg (2.2 lb). Make sure you fasten screws only into a solid wall or pillar. Do not attach to a wall

that is made of plaster, decorative veneer sheeting or other material that peels easily. If the screws come off and a speaker falls,

somebody may get injured.

• Do not attach the speakers using nails or two-sided tape. Vibration during use may cause the nails to loosen, tape to peel off and

speakers to fall, resulting in injury.

• CinemaStation may fall over if your feet or hands get caught in the speaker cable. Make sure the cables are fixed in place.

• After attaching everything, check the overall safety of your installation.

YAMAHA will bear no responsibility for accidents caused by improperly placed equipment or faulty installation methods.

Placing the Front and Surround Speakers

Attach to the wall using the two holes on the back of the Front and

Surround Speakers.

Attach 2 screws (3.5 to 4 mm dia., commercially

available) to each place you want to hang a Front

or Surround Speaker.

Hang the speakers on the screws using the

holes in the back of each speaker.

• Make sure that the tapping screw enters the narrow part of the hole

and the speaker is fixed securely in place.

As shown in the picture, attach the non-skid pads on the bottoms

of the Front and Surround Speakers in the four corners. This

stabilizes the speakers to prevent sliding.

* Place on a stable, flat surface.

You can place the Front Speakers and Surround Speakers

on the floor or a rack, or attach them to a wall. You can also

mount them on commercially available speaker stands.

Note

Notes

Non-skid pad

Screws (3.5 to 4 mm dia.,

commercially available)

110 mm

10 mm

20 mm or

When placing on the floor or a rack

When attaching to a wall

110 mm

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM55

Creating the Best Listening Space

Use the supplied screw to attach the mounting

bracket to the bottom of the speaker.

The jutting part of the bracket enters the groove at the

speaker base.

Use the bracket holes (60 mm spacing) to fasten

the mounting bracket to the speaker stand.

Use the screws (4 mm dia.), spring washers and washers.

Mounting bracket

(supplied)

Screw (supplied)

60 mm

When attaching to a speaker stand and bracket

• When attaching to a speaker stand and bracket, be sure to read their

respective owner’s manuals.

• When attaching to the optional SPS-200 Speaker Stands, you do not

need to attach the supplied mounting brackets.

Advice

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM56

Creating the Best Listening Space

English

Yamaha Speaker Stand SPS-200 (Option)

With the SPS-200 Speaker Stands, you can set the Front

Speakers and Surround Speakers on the floor. (2 stands/set)

SPS-200

Using Commercially Available Speakers or Cables

• Use speakers of the same manufacturer and quality, if possible. If the

quality of each speaker differs, the voice of a moving person may

become unnatural.

Advice

You can use commercially available speakers instead of

the supplied Center Speaker, Front Speakers, Surround

Speakers, or Subwoofer. You can also use commercially

available speaker cables instead of the supplied cables.

• Use a speaker with 6-ohm impedance or more. If a speaker

with less than 6-ohm impedance is used, the protective circuit

may trip or the speaker may malfunction.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If these speakers still

create interference with the monitor, place the speakers away

from the monitor.

• Make sure the speaker cable you use is the same thickness as

the supplied cable.

* SPS-200 stands may not be available in certain regions.

Notes

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM57

Creating the Best Listening Space

Push up the release button and pull out the

supplied speaker cable from the connector.

Peel away about 10 mm of covering from the tip

of the commercially available cable and firmly

twist the cable cores.

Not twisting firmly can cause a short.

Keep pushing up the release button and insert

the cable cores of the commercially available

cable.

Match the speaker cable polarity (+/-) with the polarity

indicator (+/-) of the connector.

Release your finger from the release button to

fasten the cable.

Release button

10 mm

Polarity indicator ⳮ

Polarity indicator Ⳮ

Changing the speaker cables

Release button

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM58

Creating the Best Listening Space

English

Adjusting the Speaker Balance with a Test Tone

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

VOLUME

+ / –

TEST

Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level

The default settings of the Speakers are suitable for most conditions.

However, depending on room conditions or listening position, you may

need to adjust the Speaker volume level, especially when changing

speaker or furniture position.

This adjustment is important because it brings out the maximum effect of

the DSP Program, and faithfully reproduces the acoustic personalities of

Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Digital and DTS.

Even after performing the test tone, you may still like to adjust the

speaker volume level for some sources. In this case see page 61,

“Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level During Playback”.

• You cannot adjust the volume level while connected to headphones. To adjust, disconnect

your headphones.

Adjust the volume so that it is the same for each speaker

from your listening position.

• To adjust the sound, use the Remote Control from your listening

position.

Press AMP.

Press TEST.

Note

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM59

Creating the Best Listening Space

• If you raise the volume level of the Center and Surround L/R Speakers to + 10 dB and this is still less than the Front Speakers,

set the “* F. Level” in the SET MENU to -10 dB and lower the volume level of the Front Speakers by about 1/3. If you change

the volume level of the Front Speakers, adjust the volume level of the Center and Surround L/R Speakers once again.

Adjust the overall sound using the VOLUME +/-

so that you can hear the test tone.

The picture on the left shows the test tone order: LEFT

(Front L Speaker) → CENTER (Center Speaker) →

RIGHT (Front R Speaker) → R SUR. (Surround R

Speaker) → L SUR. (Surround L Speaker) →

SUBWOOFER (Subwoofer). Each speaker outputs sound

for about 2 seconds. The speaker currently outputting a

test tone appears in the CinemaStation Display.

While a test tone is outputting from the speaker

you want to adjust, press q or w and tune it to

the same volume level as the Front Speakers.

Only the speaker currently being adjusted produces a test

tone.

• While in test tone mode you cannot adjust the volume level of the

Front Speakers which serve as the standard. If you need to adjust the

volume level of the Front Speakers, exit the test tone mode and press

VOLUME +/-.

When adjustment is finished, press TEST.

The test tone stops.

Note

• If “* CENTER” in the SET MENU is set to “NON”, the Center Speaker signal is distributed to the Front L/R Speakers at the

same volume level and output. In this case, you cannot adjust the audio output level of the Center Speaker.

• If “* SUR”. in the SET MENU is set to “NON”, you cannot adjust the volume level of the Surround L/R Speakers. The test tone

skips the Surround L/R Speakers and continues its cycle.

• If “* BASS” in the SET MENU is set to “FRONT”, the test tone skips the Subwoofer and continues its cycle.

• The test tone for Subwoofer is different from the others, but this is not a defect.

Notes

Advice

RIGHTLEFT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

L SUR. R SUR.

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM60

Creating the Best Listening Space

English

Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level During Playback

• The volume level adjustment range is +10 dB to -10 dB.

• You cannot adjust the Left and Right Surround Speakers individually. The same adjustment level will be applied to both.

If the level adjusted during the sound test was different for Left and Right and one speaker was then tuned to a maximum of +10

dB or a minimum of -10 dB, the value cannot be adjusted any further up or down.

• We recommend that you first adjust the speaker balance with a test tone. See page 59, “Adjusting the Speaker Balance

with a Test Tone”.

• If you change the speaker volume level with the SW, CENTER or SURR buttons, the levels you adjust with the test tone also

change.

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

SURR

+ / –

SW + / –

CENTER

+ / –

Adjust the volume level of the Subwoofer, Center and

Surround Left/Right Speakers, if you feel the speaker is

unbalanced during audio playback.

• Volume levels other than for Front Speakers can be adjusted.

Advice

Press AMP during playback.

Adjust the speaker volume level.

To adjust the Subwoofer volume press SW +/-.

To adjust the Center Speaker volume press

CENTER +/-.

To adjust the Surround Speakers volume press

SURR +/-.

• Depending on your settings in SET MENU, volume level adjustment may not be available for a speaker.

– If “* CENTER” is set to “NON” you cannot adjust the Center Speaker.

– If “* SUR.” is set to “NON” you cannot adjust the Surround Speakers.

– If “* BASS” is set to “FRONT” you cannot adjust the Subwoofer.

Advice

Note

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM61

Creating the Best Listening Space

• You can adjust the speaker volume level from 0 to 100%. The factory default setting is 100%, which is the maximum value.

You can adjust the speaker volume for 5ch Stereo DSP Program

Press AMP during playback.

Repeatedly press MUSIC and select “5ch

Stereo”.

Repeatedly press g or h, and select the speaker

you want to adjust.

The switching order is CT LEV → RL LEV → RR LEV

→ CT LEV...

To adjust the Center Speaker volume level, select CT

LEV.

To adjust the Surround L Speaker volume level, select

RL LEV.

To adjust the Surround R Speaker volume level, select

RR LEV.

Press q or w and adjust the speaker volume

level.

When setting to 50%, the speaker volume becomes half,

and when setting to 0%, you hear no sound from the

Speaker.

• The volume levels adjusted with the test tone or the CENTER or SURR buttons in 5ch Stereo mode are replaced with the

setting with “CT LEV”, “RL LEV” or “RR LEV”. The actual volume you hear is the volume shown in the CinemaStation

Display multiplied by the percentage you set for volume level.

• If “* CENTER” is set to “NON”, you cannot adjust the Center Speaker. If “* SUR.” is set to “NON”, you cannot adjust the

Surround Speakers.

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

MUSIC

Notes

Advice

Adjust speaker volume for 5ch Stereo DSP Program

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM62

Creating the Best Listening Space

English

Setting the Speaker Size

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

SET MENU

• Even if “* FRONT” is set to “SML”, when “* BASS” is set to “FRONT”, low tones below 90 Hz of the Front L/R channel

signal will output from the Front Speakers.

• If you select a sound field effect when “* SUR.” is set to “NON”, CinemaStation enters Virtual Cinema DSP mode.

• Settings made in Speaker mode are not reflected when connected to headphones.

To get the most out of the sound field effects, you need to use all 6 of the

supplied speakers (Front, Center, Surround and Subwoofer). But depending

on your listening objectives, you can turn off specified speakers.

When using any speaker other than YAMAHA Speaker Set NX-P200, you

need to specify the speaker size.

You can specify these settings in Speaker mode.

Setting the Speaker Mode

Specify the speaker to produce no sound by setting

“* CENTER”, “* SUR.” or “* BASS”.

When using other speakers, be sure to set the speaker

size, and depending on your listening objectives set the

Front Speaker level.

Press AMP.

Press SET MENU.

“* Speaker Set” appears.

Press w.

Press h or g to select item you want to set.

Press q or w to change the setting.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the needed item.

When exiting the SET MENU, press SET MENU.

Pressing any one of the DSP Program buttons also exits

the SET MENU.

Note

Advice

• When a sampling digital signal over 48 kHz is input, some settings may not be reflected in the playback sound.

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM63

Creating the Best Listening Space

* CENTER

Sets whether the Center Speaker is present or not, and

sets the size of the Center Speaker.

Selection items: LRG (Large), SML (Small), NON

(None)

Default setting: SML

LRG: Select this setting when using a big Center

Speaker. The entire frequency band of the center

channel signal is output as it is from the Center

Speaker.

SML: Select this setting when using a small Center

Speaker. A center channel signal with a low tone

of 90 Hz or below is output from the speaker set

to * BASS.

NON: Select this setting when not using a Center

Speaker. The center channel signal distributes the

same volume level to the Front L/R Speakers.

* FRONT

Sets the size of the Front Speakers.

Selection items: LRG (Large), SML (Small)

Default setting: SML

LRG: Select this setting when using large Front

Speakers. The entire frequency band of the front

L/R channel signal is output as it is from the

Front Left and Right Speakers.

SML: Select this setting when using small Front

Speakers. A front L/R channel signal with a low

tone of 90 Hz or below is output from the speaker

set to * BASS.

* SUR.

Sets whether the Surround L/R Speakers are present or

not, and sets the size of the Surround L/R Speakers.

Selection items: LRG (Large), SML (Small), NON

(None)

Default setting: SML

LRG: Select this setting when using large Surround L/R

Speakers or when using Surround L/R Speakers

with surround subwoofers connected by speaker

cables.

The entire frequency band of the surround L/R

channel signal is output as it is from the Surround

Speakers.

SML: Select this setting when using small Surround L/R

Speakers. A surround L/R channel signal with a

low tone of 90 Hz or below is output from the

speaker set to * BASS.

NON: Select this setting when not using Surround L/R

Speakers. The surround L/R channel signal

distributes the same volume level to the Front L/

R Speakers.

* BASS

Selects the speaker to output a LFE/BASS (low tone)

signal.

Selection items: SWFR (Subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH

Default setting: SWFR

SWFR: Select this setting when using a Subwoofer.

The LFE and low tone (90 Hz and below)

sound from other channels, depending on *

CENTER, * FRONT and * SUR. settings, are

output from the Subwoofer.

FRONT: Select this setting when not using a

Subwoofer. The LFE and low tone (90 Hz and

below) sound from other channels, depending

on * CENTER, * FRONT and * SUR. settings,

are output from the Front L/R Speakers.

BOTH: Select this item to mix low frequence tones of

90 Hz and below with a LFE channel when

using a Subwoofer, independent of the Front

Speaker Sound mode setting.

The entire frequency band of the front L/R

channel is output from both the Front L/R

Speakers and Subwoofer. Sound can output

from the Subwoofer during 2-channel or

Dolby Surround playback.

* F. Level

Selects the Front Speaker level.

When the Front Speaker volume level is extremely high

and out of alignment with that of other speakers, you can

lower the volume level and regain a balance.

Selection items: Nrm (Normal), -10 dB

Default setting: Nrm

Nrm: Usually this setting is selected.

-10 dB: Use this setting if the output level of the Center

or Surround Speakers is out of alignment with

the Front Speakers. The volume level of the

Front Speakers decreases 10 dB (about 1/3).

• When “BOTH” is selected during Super Audio CD playback,

output is only from the subwoofer.

Advice

012DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:18 AM64

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

English

Selecting DSP Program Effects

To get the most out of CinemaStation, select a sound field based on how

many speakers you want to use and the listening environment.

Select a sound field based on

how many speakers you want

to have sound.

• For a 6-speaker plus surround

back speaker setup, see page 65,

“Using Matrix 6.1”.

• For a 6-speaker setup, see page

67, “Using All Speakers for CD

or Video Playback”.

• For a 2-speaker setup, see page

69, “Using Front Speakers Only

for DSP Program (Virtual

Cinema DSP)”.

Select a sound field based on

your listening environment

• For headphones, see page 70,

“Using a DSP Program with

Headphones (“SILENT

CINEMA”)”.

• For evening enjoyment, see page

71, “Using a DSP Program with

Low Volume (Night Listening)”.

• For setting a DSP Program to

match your listening room, see

page 72, “Changing the Delay

Time of a DSP Program”.

Enjoy original Dolby and DTS

sound

• To listen to original Dolby or

DTS sound as it is, see page 74,

“Reproducing the Original

Dolby and DTS Sound”.

• To listen to stereo sound as it is,

see page 75, “Reproducing

Stereo Sound”.

Using Matrix 6.1

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

MATRIX 6.1

Matrix 6.1 sound creates a realistic sense of sonic

movement with a surround back sound.

You can enjoy Dolby Digital plus Matrix 6.1 or DTS plus

Matrix 6.1 sound without adjusting any settings when you

play a Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES disc.

In addition to Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES discs,

you can also enjoy Matrix 6.1 sound with a 5.1 channel

source. Selecting Matrix 6.1 with the MATRIX 6.1 button

will enable the Dolby Digital plus Matrix 6.1 and DTS plus

Matrix 6.1 decoder. The surround L/R channel will produce

a surround back channel, making it possible to output

sound from a virtual surround back speaker.

Press AMP.

Press MATRIX 6.1 to set.

The display indicator switches in the following order each

time you press MATRIX 6.1 : AUTO (auto-recognition)

→ Matrix 6.1 (Matrix audio) → OFF → AUTO...

• CinemaStation cannot use DSP Programs when playing Super Audio CDs.

Advice

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM65

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

• When the Matrix 6.1 decoder is working, the MATRIX indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. 6.1 appears beside the

DSP Program name (For example: Action 6.1). Matrix 6.1 appears with Dolby Digital and DTS sound fields.

• Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES discs do not contain a signal (flag) that CinemaStation can use for auto

recognition. To play this type of disc with 6.1-channel sound, press MATRIX 6.1 to select Matrix 6.1.

• In the cases below, 6.1-channel sound cannot play even if you press MATRIX 6.1.

–If “* SUR.” is set to “NON” in the SET MENU.

–If sound effect is set to off (Stereo Playback).

–If headphones are connected.

–If a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is playing.

–If you select 5ch Stereo DSP Program.

• If you turn on the power once more after CinemaStation goes into standby, Matrix 6.1 returns to AUTO.

AUTO: When playing back a 6.1 channel source

(Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES), the

sound is automatically switched either to

Dolby Digital plus Matrix 6.1 or DTS plus

Matrix 6.1 audio. Even if you play a 5.1

channel source with this setting, no virtual

surround back speaker is created.

MATRIX 6.1: Select this item to play a 5.1 channel source

with Matrix 6.1. Sound outputs from the

virtual surround back speaker.

OFF: The Matrix 6.1 decoder is not enabled. Even

if you play a Dolby Digital Surround EX or

DTS ES disc, no sound outputs from the

virtual surround back speaker.

Advice

Notes

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM66

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

English

Using All Speakers for CD or Video Playback

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

SELECT

q/DTS

• You can also press the DSP button on CinemaStation to select “PRO LOGIC II Movie” or “PRO LOGIC II Music”.

• Even if you play back a monaural source with Dolby Pro Logic II, CinemaStation cannot reproduce multi-channel sound.

Selecting Dolby Pro Logic II converts a 2-channel source

into virtual multi-channels for enjoying sound using all

speakers.

Play the 2-channel source.

Press AMP.

Press q/DTS.

Press SELECT repeatedly to select “PRO LOGIC

II”.

Press q/DTS to select “PRO LOGIC II Movie” or

“PRO LOGIC II Music”.

Each time the button is pressed the selection switches

between “PRO LOGIC II Movie” and “PRO LOGIC II

Music”. Match your source with the appropriate selection

item, Movie or Music.

Advice

Note

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM67

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

Below are the “Pro Logic II Music” setting values

(parameters).

PANORAMA

Gives front L/R channel sound a wraparound effect, distributed

throughout the entire surround sound field, for an expansive

feeling.

Function: Expands the front sound field of Dolby Pro Logic II.

Selection item: OFF/ON

Default setting: OFF

DIM. (Dimension)

Adjusts the difference in volume between front and surround

channels to the volume balance you desire.

Function: Adjusts the difference between front surround sound

field and surround volume.

Variable range: -3 (stronger toward the surround direction) to

+3 (stronger toward the front direction).

Default setting: STD (Standard)

CT WIDTH

Distributes the center channel sound to the left and right.

Function: Expands audio from the front sound field to the left

and right.

Variable range: 0 to 7.

If set to 0 center channel sound will only output from Center

Speaker. As the value rises center channel sound is incrementally

distributed to the L/R Speakers. When set to 7, sound will only

output from the L/R Speakers.

Default setting: 3

You can change the settings (parameters) for Dolby Pro Logic II

Music and adjust the sound field to match your listening space.

Perform steps 1 to 5 in “Using All Speakers for

CD or Video Playback” on page 67, and select

“PRO LOGIC II Music”.

Press h or g repeatedly to select “PANORAMA”,

“DIM.” or “CT WIDTH”.

Press q or w to change the setting value.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to change other

setting values.

Change the Dolby Pro Logic II Music setting

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM68

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

English

Using Front Speakers Only for DSP Program (Virtual Cinema DSP)

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

SET MENU

• For Virtual Cinema DSP, the VIRTUAL indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display.

In the cases below, even if “* SUR.” is set to “NON” in the SET MENU, Virtual Cinema DSP does not function.

• When you select the following DSP Programs: 5ch Stereo; PL Normal; Dolby Digital Normal or DTS Normal; PL II Movie or

PL II Music.

• When sound field effects are off (Stereo Playback).

• When a digital audio sampling frequency over 48 kHz is input.

• When using a test tone.

• When listening through headphones.

Since Virtual Cinema DSP processes the sound input

source, you can virtually reproduce surround speakers,

and enjoy a DSP Program with only your Front L/R

Speakers.

Play the source.

Press AMP.

Select a DSP Program.

Set “* SUR.” to “NON” in the SET MENU. See

page 63, “Setting the Speaker Mode”.

Advice

Notes

DSP Program buttons

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM69

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

CINEMA

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

• When “SILENT CINEMA” is on, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display.

• CinemaStation mixes LFE channel audio and other channel audio.

• When headphones are connected, sound does not output from any speaker regardless of whether sound field effect is on or off.

• When you do not select any DSP Program, the headphone produces normal stereo sound.

• If CinemaStation inputs a digital audio sampling frequency over 48 kHz, “SILENT CINEMA” does not function.

Connect your headphones to the (phones) jack on

CinemaStation and enjoy multi-speaker simulation called

“SILENT CINEMA”.

Using a DSP Program with Headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”)

Connect your headphones to the (phones)

jack on CinemaStation.

Play the source.

Select a DSP Program.

Advice

Note

DSP Program buttons

(phones) jack

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM70

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

English

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

NIGHT

• All DSP Programs are available in Night Listening mode.

• Night Listening mode does not work when listening through headphones.

You can control the big sound effects and focus on

listening clearly to speech. Enjoy a DSP Program even in

the evening at a low volume.

Using a DSP Program with Low Volume (Night Listening)

Play the source.

Press AMP.

Select a DSP Program.

Press NIGHT to activate Night Listening mode.

“Night L. ON” appears in the CinemaStation Display.

To return to normal play

Press NIGHT to deactivate Night Listening mode. “Night L.

OFF” appears in the CinemaStation Display.

Advice

DSP Program

buttons

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM71

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

Changing the Delay Time of a DSP Program

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

S TATU S

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

SELECT

q/DTS

• You can also adjust the Delay Time of Matrix 6.1 DSP Program.

• Depending on the source it is possible to over or under adjust the Delay Time and create an unnatural sound effect.

• While adjusting the Delay Time, you hear no sound temporarily.

Each DSP Program is designed to draw out the maximum

effect from the source audio. CinemaStation provides the

DSP Programs with optimum value of parameters including

reflected sound, reverberant sound and Delay Time.

Among these parameters, you can change the Delay Time

to match to your Speaker positions.

Delay Time is the time gap in playback between front

speaker audio and surround speaker audio. The bigger the

value becomes the later the surround audio plays back,

and the bigger the sound space feels.

Delay Time is preset at an optimum value for each DSP

Program. In most cases, the default value will work well for

your listening enjoyment. But depending on the audio

source or listening environment, you can adjust each DSP

Program the way you like.

Play the source.

Press AMP.

Select a DSP Program.

To select a Movie, Music, Sports, or Game DSP Program,

press the appropriate DSP Program button (MOVIE,

MUSIC, SPORTS or GAME).

To select a Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS, after

pressing q/DTS, repeatedly press SELECT until you

come to the item you want.

Press h or g.

The DELAY indicator appears in the CinemaStation

Display.

Press q or w to adjust the Delay Time.

Advice

Notes

DSP

Program

buttons

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM72

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

English

Program

Program Name

Default Setting

Group (ms)

MOVIE

Action 20

Action 6.1 15

Drama 20

Drama 6.1 15

Sci-Fi 20

Sci-Fi 6.1 15

Spectacle 23

Spectacle 6.1 15

Theater 20

Theater 6.1 5

MUSIC 1 Music Video 21

2 Classic Hall 30

3 Jazz Club 30

4 Rock Concert 15

SPORTS 1 Live Sports 10

GAME 1 Game 36

Program Name

Default Setting

(ms)

PL Normal

(Dolby Pro Logic)

Normal

(Dolby Digital, DTS)

Matrix 6.1

(Dolby Digital, DTS)

II Movie

(Dolby Pro Logic II Movie)

II Music

(Dolby Pro Logic II Music)

Default values for Delay Time

Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic and DTS

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM73

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

Reproducing the Original Dolby and DTS Sound

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

S TATU S

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

SELECT

q/DTS

You can play back and enjoy movie sound processed with

Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS. Enjoy smooth,

precise and flowing audio of the original sound design.

Play the source.

Press AMP.

Press q/DTS.

The suitable Program is selected depending on the input

source.

Dolby Digital: Normal appears, and qindicator lights up.

DTS: Normal appears, and t indicator lights up.

When the 2-channel source (Dolby Pro Logic) is selected,

first, press q/DTS. Then, press SELECT to select PL

Normal.

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM74

More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects

English

Reproducing Stereo Sound

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

STEREO

• If “* BASS” in the SET MENU is set to “BOTH” or “* FRONT” is set to “SML”, a low tone is output from the Subwoofer.

• If sound field effects are off, no sound will output from the Center Speaker or Surround L/R Speakers.

• The volume may become very low if you turn off sound field effects and set “* D. Range” to “MIN” in the SET MENU. In this

case, turn on sound field effects.

• If sound field effects are off and you play Dolby Digital or DTS audio, the volume balance of the Front L/R Speakers may be

disturbed. This is because the dynamic range becomes compressed and the channel sound set in “* Speaker Set” in the SET

MENU mixes and outputs with the front L/R channel sound.

Play the source.

Press AMP.

Press STEREO.

The STEREO indicator lights up in the CinemaStation

Display.

If sound field effects are off, you will have normal stereo

playback. Press STEREO once more to turn on the sound

field effect.

Advice

Notes

You can enjoy the 2-channel (stereo sound) source only

with the Front L/R Speakers.

013DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:19 AM75

Types of Input Signals

You can check the type of input signal and format from the CinemaStation

Display.

You can also set the input mode to select the digital/analog entry sequence

or to only input a specified signal.

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

S TATU S

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

STEREO

Checking Sound Information (Input Signal Information Display)

During playback, you can show input signal type, format

and sampling frequency information in the CinemaStation

Display.

Play the source.

Press AMP.

Press STEREO.

Stereo playback begins.

Press g.

Input signal information appears.

Depending on the input source, input signal information

changes each time you press g.

014DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:20 AM76

Types of Input Signals

English

Note on digital signals that exceed 48 kHz

CinemaStation’s digital input jack can input a sampling

frequency up to 96 kHz. For details read the owner’s

manual of the device connected to the digital input jack.

Keep in mind the points below when inputting a digital

signal that exceeds 48 kHz.

• DSP Programs are not selectable. You can only listen to

normal 2-channel stereo from the Front Speakers.

• During playback, you cannot adjust the volume level of

Center and Surround L/R Speakers.

• Depending on the “* Speaker Set” setting in the SET

MENU, the Subwoofer may output sound.

Input signal information

■ (Format)

Shows the input signal format. When the digital input

cannot be recognized, the mode is set to analog.

Input Signal Format Display

Analog Audio Analog

PCM Audio PCM

Dolby Digital Audio Dolby DGTL

DTS Audio DTS

Other Digital Signals Unknwn DGTL

■ (Audio Channels)

Shows the number of audio channels an input signal

contains (only when Dolby Digital or DTS is input).

For example, “in: 3/2/LFE” indicates 3 Front Channels,

2 Surround Channels and LFE.

“1+1” indicates Main + Sub in bilingual broadcasts or

other 2 channel audio, and MLT indicates 3-channel or

more multi-channel audio.

■ fs

Shows the frequency sampling of an input signal (only

when digital signal is input). If the sampling frequency

cannot be measured, “unknown” appears.

■ rate (bit rate)

Shows the amount of data an input signal contains per

second (only Dolby Digital and DTS). If the bit rate

cannot be measured, “unknown” appears.

■ flg (flag)

Shows a recognition signal (flag), in an input signal and

initiates an action (only Dolby Digital and DTS). If the

flag cannot be recognized, “None” appears.

014DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:20 AM77

Types of Input Signals

Switching Input Modes

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

• It is possible to switch Input mode even if you press INPUT on CinemaStation for more than one second.

• When Input mode is set to AUTO and a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the most suitable decoder is automatically

selected.

• The following happens when set to Input mode and DTS is played:

— CinemaStation detects the DTS signal and automatically switch to DTS mode (t indicator lights up). Once DTS audio

finishes playback, the t indicator may blink, and while it blinks only DTS audio can be played back. Immediately after

DTS audio finishes playback, if you want to play normal PCM audio, reset the Input mode to AUTO.

— If the DTS signal is interrupted when you perform Search or Skip, the t indicator may blink. If this condition continues

for over 30 seconds, the Input mode automatically changes from DTS to normal digital (PCM) and the t goes out.

• Using “* Input Mode” in the SET MENU you can set whether to use the Input mode specified previously when CinemaStation

was turned on or return to AUTO.

• It is not possible to select ANLG with the DVD/CD Input Selection button.

• You cannot switch input modes when the input jack you select with the Input Selection button can only accept an analog input

signal.

• To play back DTS, set the Input mode to AUTO or DTS. Do not set it to ANLG. If you do, audio may not output or you may

hear noise.

You can playback most sources without a problem with

the AUTO setting (factory default setting). Then depending

on your needs, you can select the priority level for digital

and analog input signals, and specify formats such as

DTS.

Press the Input Selection button for current input

source until the desired input mode appears in the

CinemaStation Display.

AUTO: Input signal can be selected in the order below.

1) Digital signal

2) Analog signal

DTS: Only DTS can be played.

ANLG: Only analog signal can be played.

Learning about input modes, jacks and Input Selection

buttons

CinemaStation can receive signals from the VIDEO 1 (analog),

VIDEO 2 (analog), VCR (analog), MD/CD-R (analog), and

OPTICAL (digital) jacks of connected equipment. You can

assign a VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR or MD/CD-R input name to

the OPTICAL IN jack. This will allow you to use the VIDEO 1,

VIDEO 2, VCR or MD/CD-R button to input a device

connected to the OPTICAL IN jack (MD/CD-R is assigned in

the default setting.) Normally, an analog signal is input to the

VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR or MD/CD-R IN jack, and a digital

signal is input to the OPTICAL IN jack. However, by setting

the input mode to AUTO the input will be automatically

detected and you can then playback audio from the device you

want by simply pressing an Input Selection button.

Advice

Notes

Input

Selection

buttons

Notes

• U.K. and Europe models only have VIDEO instead of VIDEO 1 and

VIDEO 2.

• VIDEO is used as VIDEO 1 in above models.

014DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:20 AM78

Additional Features

English

Using the Sleep Timer

After a specified time the power automatically enters standby so you can

enjoy CinemaStation until you fall asleep.

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

S TATU S

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SLEEP

• You cannot link the sleep timer of the device that is playing, so make sure to set the sleep timer of each device separately.

• The Sleep Timer cancels if you press POWER on the Remote Control, press STANDBY/ON on CinemaStation or pull out the

power cord.

• Memory backup remembers the previous setting so you can use the same setting next time.

Play the source.

Repeatedly press SLEEP and set the time to

enter standby mode.

The CinemaStation Display changes as shown below.

Once the Sleep Timer is set a SLEEP indicator lights up

in the CinemaStation Display.

SLEEP 120 min

SLEEP 90 min

SLEEP 60 min

SLEEP 30 min

SLEEP OFF

To cancel the Sleep Timer

Keep pressing SLEEP until SLEEP OFF appears in the

CinemaStation Display.

In a few seconds SLEEP OFF disappears. The CinemaStation

Display once again shows the DSP Program and the SLEEP

indicator disappears.

Advice

015DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:20 AM79

Additional Features

Enjoying High-Quality Video

Progressive Scan (NTSC only)

The COMPONENT VIDEO jack on CinemaStation is compatible with

Progressive Scan. You can enjoy highly defined images without flicker when

connecting to a television that has a component video input jack compatible

with Progressive Scan.

Progressive Scan is available only for NTSC signal output. See pages

95 and 96, “On Screen Menu Guide”.

• Before connecting make sure to turn off the television and CinemaStation power.

Connect the television.

Use a commercially available component video cable.

Start playing the DVD. See page 10, “Viewing a DVD”.

Press PROGRESSIVE on CinemaStation.

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

(480p/480i)

(

DVD ONLY

)

MONITOR

OUT

IN OUT

DIGITAL AUDIO

OPTICAL

SUBWOOFER

OUT

SYSTEM

CONNECTOR

UNBAL

ANT

GND

ANT

PROGRESSIVE

• If you play video with a 4:3 aspect ratio on a 16:9 wide television screen, Progressive Scan may fill the screen top to bottom.

In this case, use the On Screen Menu to change to the screen display that matches your television. See pages 95 and 96, “On

Screen Menu Guide”.

If you cannot adjust the size, turn off Progressive Scan. (Changes to interlace output.)

• When Progressive Scan is on, a video signal will only output from the COMPONENT VIDEO. You can use the

COMPONENT VIDEO jack and Progressive Scan only for DVD playback, so it is not possible to enjoy progressive playback

from other sources.

CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE

WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525

PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT YOU SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO

THE “STANDARD DEFINITION” OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING YOUR VIDEO MONITOR

COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS UNIT, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER.

This unit is compatible with the complete line of YAMAHA projectors, including the DPX-1, LPX-500, DPX-1000 and with the

YAMAHA PDM-1 plasma display.

Please...

Advice

The PROGRESSIVE

indicator lights up.

To cancel Progressive Scan

Press PROGRESSIVE to turn off the PROGRESSIVE indicator.

Note

015DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:20 AM80

Additional Features

English

Protecting Your Children from Undesirable Material

Using Parental Control

You can cut a scene that you do not feel it is suitable for your children, or lock a

disc from being played.

CinemaStation allows you to set the level of Parental Control. It then checks the

level of a disc whose level has been set in advance and automatically decides if

the content is suitable for viewing by your children before playing.

Setting the Password and Parental Control Level

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

• The default password is 0000.

• If the password you input is wrong, some menu items, such as Parental level or Disc Lock, are grayed out. Enter the correct

password.

• If you forget your password, press s four times, instead of the Number buttons.

Advice

Press w to select “Enter PIN”, then press w.

Press w and h a number of times to select

“Access”.

Press g to select “Setup”.

Press ON SCREEN.

Number

buttons

Program

View

Play Option

Toolbar

Preferences

Setup

Access

Language

Audio Menu

Features

Setup

Preferences

Toolbar

Disc lock

Parental level

Enter PIN

Change PIN

Access

Language

* * * *

Disc lock

Parental level

Change PIN

Enter PIN

015DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:20 AM81

Additional Features

CHCH

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

Perform steps 1 to 5 in “Setting the Password

and Parental Control Level” on page 81.

Enter the new password (4 digits) again for

confirmation.

Enter the new password (4 digits) with the

Number buttons.

Enter the current password (4 digits) with the

Number buttons.

Press g to select Change PIN, then press w.

Number

buttons

Change the password

Press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen

Menu.

Press w or q and select control level (0 to 8).

0: Parental Control is set to off, and you can play all

discs.

1 to 7: You can play discs of same level or below the level

you set. The smaller the number the stricter Parental

Control is.

8: You can play all discs.

Press h and select “Parental level”.

Use the Number buttons to enter a password (4

digits).

Number

buttons

* * * *

Enter PIN

Disc lock

Parental level

Change PIN

Enter PIN

Parental level

Disc lock

Change PIN

Enter PIN

Parental level

Disc lock

Change PIN

Press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen

Menu.

015DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:20 AM82

Additional Features

English

• The identification data of a disc that is played when the disc lock is on is stored in CinemaStation’s memory. The next time the disc is

played the restriction method selected previously is applied. If you select “Play once”, the next time the disc is played the selection

window will appear. However, if you select “Play always”, the next time the disc is played the selection window will not appear. After

appears on the screen, press s within about 10 seconds.

• The memory can only store identification data for up to 120 discs. If you play the 121st disc, the identification data of the first disc

(oldest) will be erased from memory.

Locking a Disc

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

When you are finished with the setting press the

ON SCREEN key and the On Screen Menu will

close.

As long as a password is not entered playback will not be

possible.

Select Off if you do not want to lock.

After pressing the w key, press the h key and

select On.

Press the h key a number of times and select the

disc lock.

Disc lock is a function that restricts the playback of a video

disc. Setting the disc lock to on enables the lock and

disables disc playback. However, each time a disc is

inserted, it is possible to play it by selecting a playback

restriction method “Play once” or “Play always”, then

entering your password.

Number

buttons

Off

Parental level

Disc lock

Enter PIN

Disc lock

Parental level

Enter PIN

Off

Advice

Perform steps 1 to 5 in “Setting the password

and Parental Control Level” (Page 81).

Insert a disc.

A selection window with “Play once” and “Play always”

will appear on the TV screen.

After pressing the w key enter a password using

the number keys.

Playback starts.

Use the h key or g key to select “Play once” or

“Play always”.

How to enter a password and begin playback

015DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:20 AM83

Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control

Storing Manufacturer Codes in the Remote

Control

If you set the manufacturer code (a unique code assigned to each

manufacturer) in the CinemaStation Remote Control, you can operate a

connected television, VCR, CD or MD recorder with the Remote Control.

• Depending on the model, the Remote Control may not work, or only work with a limited

number of functions. In this case, use the remote control that came with the television, VCR,

CD or MD recorder.

Setting the Manufacturer Code

When a manufacturer code is set for the TV button, VCR

button or MD/CD-R button, you can begin using the

features described in “Available Operations” on page 85.

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SHIFT

VCR

MD/CD-R

Make sure that you set the correct manufacturer

code.

With a manufacturer code set for the TV button, press the

button to turn the TV power on/off (standby), and check

that the setting is working correctly.

With a manufacturer code set for the VCR button or the

MD/CD-R button, press the button then the features

described in “Available Operations” on page 85, and

check that the setting is working correctly.

• The TV button has 299, the VCR button has 399 and the MD/CD-R

button has 499 as the factory default setting for manufacturer code.

While holding down SHIFT, enter the

manufacturer code (3 digits) of the device with

the Number buttons.

For details, refer to “Manufacturer Code List” on

pages 87 and 88.

When the setting succeeds, “Code Set OK” appears;

however, when it does not, “Code Set NG” appears in the

CinemaStation Display. If setting is unsuccessful,

perform steps 1 and 2 again.

When finished entering the code, release your finger from

SHIFT.

• Perform steps 1 to 2 while holding down SHIFT.

While holding down SHIFT, press TV, VCR or MD/

CD-R.

Each button can be assigned one manufacturer code.

• For the TV button you can only set a television manufacturer code and

for the VCR button or MD/CD-R button you can only set a VCR, CD

or MD recorder manufacturer code.

Number

buttons

016DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:21 AM84

Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control

Operating Other Equipment

with the CinemaStation Remote Control

English

Available Operations

While you set the manufacturer code for the TV, MD/CD-R or VCR button,

you can use the following functions after you press the TV, MD/CD-R or VCR

button.

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

When the Remote Control’s TV, VCR or MD/

CD-R button does not work even after

setting the device manufacturer code

Try again from step 1 and keep the following points in

mind.

• Make sure you select the Remote Control’s TV, VCR

or MD/CD-R button correctly when setting the

manufacturer code.

• If there are multiple manufacturer codes enter them in

order.

• After reinserting batteries, try the steps again (within 2

minutes of reinserting).

(When reinserting batteries be careful not to press the

Remote Control buttons. If a manufacturer code has

been set for the TV, VCR or MD/CD-R button, it may

get deleted.)

To return to the factory default settings

While pressing SHIFT down as in step 2 Setting the

Manufacturer Code, enter 299 for TV, 399 for VCR and

499 for MD/CD-R. (Step 3 is not necessary.)

Maintaining manufacturer code settings

Replace batteries before they become unusable. When

the batteries wear out and you remove them, the custom

manufacturer code setting will stay in memory for about

2 minutes. Be careful because if more than 2 minutes

elapse the codes may be deleted. Also, at this time, be

careful not to accidentally press a Remote Control

button. This can delete the codes.

TV POWER

TV Input Switch

Stop

Fast Forward

Pause

Playback

Video Channel Selection (+)

Press VCR or MD/CD-R before starting

operations.

TV Channel Selection (+)

TV Channel Selection (-)

Rewind

Video Channel Selection (-)

TV Volume (+)

TV Volume (-)

VCR operation

While you set the TV manufacturer code for the TV button, you can operate your television.

016DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 1:09 PM85

Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

S TATU S

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

TV operation

CD or MD recorder operation

Press POWER before starting operations.

Channel Selection (+)

Channel Selection (-)

VCR Rewind

Input Switch

Volume (+)

Volume (-)

VCR Stop

VCR Fast Forward

VCR Pause

VCR Playback

Track Selection/Elapsed Time Input

StopPause

Playback

Reverse Search

Reverse Skip

Forward Search

Forward Skip

Press MD/CD-R or VCR before starting

operations.

While you set the VCR manufacturer code for the VCR button or the MD/CD-R button, you can operate your VCR.

016DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:21 AM86

Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control

Operating Other Equipment

with the CinemaStation Remote Control

English

Manufacturer Code List

Depending on the model and year, you may not be able to use some manufacturer products. In this case, use

the remote control supplied with each product.

Manufacturer Manufacturer Code

Yamaha 299/292

Admiral 292/293

Aiko 287

Aiwa 294/276/283

Akai 295/296

Alba 296

AOC 297/286

Audiovox 285

Belcor 297

Bell & Howell 292

Bestar 298

Blaupunkt 229/222

Blue sky 298

Bradford 285

Brandt 223

Brocsonic 297

Brokwood 297

Bush 296

Candle 286/297

Citizen 286/287/297

Clatronic 298

Contec 285

Craig 224/285

Croslex 225

Crown 285

Curtis Mathis 297/226/286

CXC 285

Daewoo 297/298/224/227/228/

287

Daytron 239/297

Dual 298

Dumont 297

Emerson 297/224/239/232/285

Envision 286/297

Ferguson 223/265/266

First line 298

Fisher 295/233

Fraba 298

Manufacturer Manufacturer Code

Funai 277/278/285

Futuretec 285

GE 293/297/234/235/236

Gibralter 297

LG/Goldstar 297/298/239/237

Goodmans 296/298/223

Grundig 229/238/249

Harvard 285

Hitachi 297/239/242/243

ICE 296

Irradio 296

Itt/Nokia 244/245

JC Penny 293/297/234/237/286

JVC (Victor) 296/246/247

Kendo 298

Kenwood 297

KTV 297/239/285

Loewe 298/248

LXI 293/297/225/226/233

Magnavox 297/225/239/286

Marantz 286/297

Matsui 295

MGA 286/297

Mitsubishi 299/297/259

MTC 286/297

Multitec 285

NEC 297/252/282/286

Nikko 286/287/297

Nokia 244/245

Nokia Oceanic 245

Nordmende 265/266

NTC 287

Onwa 296/285

Panasonic 234/235/236/253

Philco 297/225/239/286

Philips 225

Pilot 297

Pioneer 226/235/254/255/268

Manufacturer Manufacturer Code

Portland 297/256/287

Quasar 234/235

Radio Shack 299/293/297/285/286

RCA 293/297/234/256/257/

258

Realistic 299/293/297/285/286

SABA 223/269/265/266

Sampo 286/297

Samsung 297/239/248/262/275/

286

Sanyo 295/233/279/272/273/

274

Schneider 296

Scott 297/285

Sharp 292/239/232/284

Shogun 297

Siemens 229

Signature 292

Sony 263

Soundesign 285

SSS 285/297

Starlite 285

Sylvania 297/225/286

Teknika 297/285/287

Telefunken 269/264/265/266

Thomson 223/266

Toshiba 292/226/267

Videch 297/242

Wards 297/239/232/286

016DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:21 AM87

Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control

Manufacturer Manufacturer Code

Yamaha 399/392/393/394

Admiral 395

Aiwa 396/397/398/329/339

Akai 322/323/324

Asha 363

Audio Dynamic 392/394

Audiovox 396

Beaumark 363

Bell & Howell 393

Blaupunkt 325/326

Brocsonic 327

Bush 322

Calix 396

Candle 335/363/396

Canon 325/328

CGM 396/332

Citizen 396

Craig 396/363

Curtis Mathis 397/328/333/392

Cybernex 363

Daewoo 328/334/335

DBX 392/394

Dimensia 333

Dynatech 397

Electrohome 396

Electrophonic 396

Emerson 327/334/396/397

Fisher 393/336

Funai 397

Garrard 397

GE 328/333/387/363

LG/Goldstar 396/388/392

Goodmans 334/337

Grandiente 397

Grundig 332/338

Hitachi 325/333/349/342/343

Harman Kardon 392

Instant Replay 325/328

Itt/Nokia 393

JCL 328

JC Penny 392/393/394/328/333/

349/363/396

JVC (Victor) 392/394/344/345/346/

347

Kendo 396

Kenwood 392/394/396

Kodak 396

Manufacturer Manufacturer Code

Lloyd 397

Loewe 396/337

Luxor 395

LXI 393/396/397/336/349

Magnavox 325/326/328

Magnin 363

Marantz 392/394/328

Marta 396

Matsui 396

MEI 328

Memorex 328/336/363/396/397

Minolta 333/349/342

Mitsubishi 399/344/348/359/352/

353

MTC 363/397

Multitech 397/348/354

NEC 392/394/344/383

Nikko 396

Noblex 363

Nokia 393/395

Nokia Oceanic 395

Okano 323

Olympic 325/328

Optimus 396

Orion 327

Panasonic 325/328/355/378/384/

385

Pentax 333/349/342

Philco 325/328

Philips 325/326/328/337/356/

357

Phonola 337

Pilot 396

Pioneer 325

Quasar 325/328

Radio Shack 396/397

Radix 396

RCA/PROSCAN 325/326/328/333/335/

349/358/369/363/342

Realistic 393/397/328/336/359/

362/396

Samsung 354/358/363/364/365/

366/335

Sansui 394

Sanyo 393/336/367/363

Schneider 337

Scott 399/335/336/348/359/

352/354/358

Sears 328/342/396

Seleco 322

Manufacturer Manufacturer Code

Sharp 395/362/382

Siemens 393

Signature 2000 395/397

Sony 368/379/372/373/374/

375

Sylvania 397/325/326/328

Symphonic 397

Tandberg 334

Tashiro 396

Tatung 392/394

Teac 392/394/397

Technics 325/328

Teknika 328/396/397

Telefunken 376/377

Thorn 393/396

Toshiba 335/369/389

Totevision 363/396

Universum 396/327/376

Vector Research 392

Videosonic 363

W.WHouse 396

Wards 395/396/336/362/328/

342/363/397

CD recorder

Manufacturer Manufacturer Code

Yamaha 499

DENON 422/423

Hitachi 424

JVC (Victor) 425/428

Kenwood 422

Marantz 422

Philips 422

Pioneer 426

Sony 427

Teac 429

MD recorder

Manufacturer Manufacturer Code

Yamaha 599/522/598

Denon 523/524

JVC (Victor) 525

Kenwood 526

Onkyo 592

Pioneer 527

Sharp 528

Sony 522

Teac 593

VCR

016DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:21 AM88

Using the SET MENU

English

Using the SET MENU

• Even during playback you can change settings in the SET MENU.

• To learn more about “* Speaker Set” read “Setting the Speaker Mode” on page 63.

You can use the SET MENU to adjust settings, including Speaker settings.

Change the settings to match your listening environment.

SET MENU List

The SET MENU contains the items below.

Advice

Item Default Setting (value)

* Speaker Set

* CENTER SML

* FRONT SML

* SUR. SML

* BASS SWFR

* F. Level Nrm

* LFE Level

* SP LFE 0 dB

* HP LFE 0 dB

* SP Delay

* CENTER 0 ms

* SA-CD Delay

* CENTER 0 ms

* SUR. 0 ms

* D. Range

* SP D.R MAX

* HP D.R MAX

* L/R Balance Center

* HP Tone CTRL

* HP BASS 0 dB

* HP TRBL 0 dB

* Input Assign

* OPT: MD/CD-R

* Input Mode

* MODE: AUTO

* Display set

* DIMMER 0

* Tuner Step AM9/FM50

(Asia, Korea and General models only)

017DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:21 AM89

Using the SET MENU

Navigating the SET MENU

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

AMP

SET MENU

Press AMP.

Press SET MENU.

Press h or g repeatedly to select the Menu you

want.

Press q or w.

Once in the setting mode of the selected menu the current

setting appears in the CinemaStation Display.

Depending on the item, press h or g to enter a submenu.

Press q or w repeatedly to change the setting.

When exiting the SET MENU, press SET MENU.

Pressing any one of DSP Program buttons also exits the

SET MENU.

017DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:22 AM90

Using the SET MENU

English

Adjust the playback level of the LFE signal

(* LFE Level)

You can adjust the LFE channel output level while

playing a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Adjust the LFE

level to match the performance of the Subwoofer and

headphones.

Submenu: SP LFE, HP LFE

Variable range (dB): -20 to 0 dB.

Default setting: 0 dB

Virtual Center Speaker Position

Set the Delay Time of the Center Speaker (*

SP Delay)

You can set the Delay Time of the Center Speaker. This

is effective when the Center Speaker outputs sound

during Dolby Digital, DTS and other forms of playback.

Normally the Center Speaker and Front L/R Speakers

are placed in line with each other. However, they should

be placed at an equal distance from the listener so that

the sound each one outputs enters the listener’s ear at the

same time. With Delay Time, the Center Speaker can be

moved to an ideal position further away to match the

distance of each speaker to the listener. Center Delay is

effective in adding depth to the sound field and presence

to speech.

Variable range (ms): 0 to 5 ms

Default setting: 0 ms

Press w to set the speaker’s virtual position further

away. Press q to set it closer.

• Every 1 ms increase in Delay Time increases the distance

away from the listening position by 30 cm (1 foot).

Advice

Set the Delay Time of the Center and

Surround Speakers during Super Audio CD

playback (* SA-CD Delay)

You can set the Delay Time of the Center and Surround

Speakers when playing Super Audio CDs containing

front-channel sound or surround-channel sound.

Normally the Center Speaker and Front L/R Speakers

are placed in line with each other and the Surround

Speakers are placed behind the listener. For best results

place them at an equal distance from the listener so that

the sound each one outputs enters the listener’s ear at the

same time. Use Delay Time to move the virtual position

of the Center Speaker or the Surround Speakers to an

ideal position further away to match the distance of each

speaker to the listener. Center Delay and Surround Delay

add depth to instrument sound and create the expansive

feeling of a concert hall.

Submenu: CENTER, SUR.

Variable range: CENTER 0 to 5 ms, SUR. 0 to 15 ms

Press w to set the speaker’s virtual position further

away. Press q to set it closer.

• Every 1 ms increase in Delay Time increases the distance

away from the listening position by 30 cm (1 foot).

LS RS

Virtual Center Speaker Position

Virtual Surround Speakers Position

Advice

017DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:22 AM91

Using the SET MENU

Reassign input jacks (* Input Assign)

You can assign CinemaStation’s OPTICAL IN jack to

VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR or MD/CD-R. When the source

is set to one of them, press the appropriate input selection

button to operate the device connected to the OPTICAL

IN jack and the input source name appears on the display

panel based on your selection.

Selection items: MD/CD-R, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR

Default setting: MD/CD-R

• U.K. and Europe models only have VIDEO instead of

VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2.

• VIDEO is used as VIDEO 1 in above models.

Set the input mode when powering on (*

Input Mode)

Set the input mode for powering on when playback devices

are connected to both digital and analog jacks.

Selection items: AUTO, LAST

Default setting: AUTO

AUTO: When CinemaStation power is turned on the input

mode automatically sets to AUTO.

LAST: The last selected input mode is applied as is.

Adjust the CinemaStation Display

brightness (* Display set)

Dimmer

You can adjust the CinemaStation Display brightness.

Variable range: -4 to 0

Default setting: 0

Press w to increase the brightness. Press q to decrease the

brightness.

Set frequency step (* Tuner Step) (Asia,

Korea and General models only)

The inter-station frequency spacing differs depending on

the areas. Set the frequency step according to the frequency

spacing in your area.

Selection items: AM9/FM50, AM10/FM100

Default setting: AM9/FM50

Press w or q to select the desired setting.

• Turn off CinemaStation after you change the setting. The

new setting becomes effective after you turn on

CinemaStation again.

• Refer to the list below for the frequency spacing.

— North, Central and South America: AM10/FM100

— Other areas: AM9/FM50

Notes

Set the dynamic range during Dolby Digital

playback (* D. Range)

You can select the dynamic range (spread between the

max. and min. volume) of Dolby Digital playback from

3 levels.

Submenu: SP D.R, HP D.R

Selection items: MAX (Maximum), STD (Standard),

MIN (Minimum)

Default setting: MAX

MAX: Plays back the dynamic range of the source at the

maximum limit.

STD: Dynamic range recommended by software

manufacturers for home use.

MIN: Easy to hear even at a low volume, dynamic range

suitable for evening listening.

• Depending on the Dolby Digital playback source, the MIN

dynamic range may not work and result in an extremely low

volume. In this case, set the dynamic range to MAX or STD.

Adjust the volume balance of the Front

Speakers (* L/R Balance)

You can set the volume balance of the Front L/R

Speakers. This setting also applies to Headphones.

Variable range: L/R 10 levels

Default setting: Center

Press w to make the sound smaller in the Front Left

Speaker, and press q to make the sound smaller in the

Front Right Speaker. You cannot turn off the sound for

either one of the Front Speaker.

Adjust the sound quality of headphones

(* HP Tone CTRL)

You can adjust the low tones (BASS) and high tones

(TRBL) of your headphones.

Submenu: HP BASS, HP TRBL

Variable range (dB): -6 to +3 dB.

Default setting: 0 dB

Press w to increase the range of the low or high tones.

Press q to decrease the range.

Note

Notes

017DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:22 AM92

Using the On Screen Menu

English

Using the On Screen Menu

You can use the On Screen Menu to adjust settings for DVD playback,

including picture and language settings.

Navigating the On Screen Menu

For example, adjust the color saturation.

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

Press w to enter the submenus.

Press h or g to select “Preference” in the Main

Menu.

Press ON SCREEN.

Program

View

Play Option

Toolbar

Preferences

Setup

Features

Picture

Preferences

Toolbar

Setup

Saturation

Contrast

Color settings

Brightness

Sharpness

Picture

Features

➡

To select other items in the submenu, press w first, and

press h or g.

Advice

018DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:22 AM93

Using the On Screen Menu

CINEMA

POWER

AUDIO

DTS

SELECT

NIGHT

TV CH

TV INPUT

SLEEP

PRESET PRESET

A B C D E

CENTER

SURR

SHIFT

STEREOMATRIX 6.1

A-B

REPEAT

ANGLE

SUBTITLE

DVR-S200 WB56620

ON SCREEN MENU

TEST

RETURN

STATUS

TV VOL

VOLUME

MUTE

AMP

DVD/CD

VCR

VIDEO 1

VIDEO 2TUNERMD/CD-R

MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME

SET MENU

ENTER

SCREEN

ENTER

Press ENTER, then press ON SCREEN to turn off

the On Screen Menu.

In some cases, you can also use h or g for setting

content.

Press q or w to set.

Press h or g to select “Saturation”.

Press w to enter menu items.

Natural

Brightness

Color settings

Saturation

Contrast

Sharpness

Contrast

Saturation

Video shift

Color settings

Contrast

Saturation

Video shift

Color settings

Advice

To set the other menu items, follow the example above.

018DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:22 AM94

Using the On Screen Menu

English

On Screen Menu Guide

Set to “On” to turn on/off the status display using

the STATUS button on the Remote Control. The

status display includes the type of disc, the

currently playing track/chapter number, the total

time of track/chapter and the elapsed time of

track/chapter. Set to “Off” to hide the status

display.

Adjust from +1 to +7. Adjusts the screen

position. The screen display moves to the right as

the number becomes larger.

Adjust from -7 to +7. Adjusts the video color

saturation.

Adjust from -7 to +7. Accentuates bright and

dark parts of video.

Adjust the video shade.

Adjust from -7 to +7. Adjusts the video

brightness.

Adjust from -7 to +7. Adjusts the video

vividness.

Deletes all Program content. Page 33

Saturation

Picture

Preference

Toolbar

Features

Program

View

Contrast

Brightness

Sharpness

Status window

Clear All

Tracks

Program

Play list (Playlist)

Zoom

Angle

Chapter Preview

Play Option

Setting ContentSetting ItemSubmenuMain Menu

Selects a track. Page 31

Selects Program Play “On”/“Off”. Page 33

Shows Playlist. Page 33

Enlarges the picture. Move + to the point to be

enlarged using h, g, q, and w. Each time you

press the ENTER key, the zoom changes. To

return it to the previous size, select Zoom 1 and

press ON SCREEN.

Switches the picture angle.

When this item is on, the beginning of each

chapter can be previewed one by one.

Selects the audio language.

Select the title, chapter or track to play.

Selects the subtitle language. You can only select

languages the disc contains.

Advances/reverses one frame at a time. Frame

Advance is not available with video CD.

Select the speed from among -8, -4, 1, 4, 8.

Specify an elapsed time and search for a scene.

Page 30

Select the speed from among -1, -1/2, -1/4, -1/8,

0, 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1.

Audio

Disc Navigation

Sub-title (Subtitle)

Frame by Frame

Video shift

Color settings

(Colour settings)

Fast

Time

Slow

018DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:22 AM95

Using the On Screen Menu

Set the Disc Lock “On”/“Off”. Page 83

Adjust the level from 0 to +8. Page 82

Enter the password. Page 81

Change the password. Page 82

Set to match your TV screen aspect.

4:3 panscan

4:3 letterbox

Wide-screen (Widescreen)

Set the video signal system*

to match your TV.

Set to AUTO when using a TV compatible with

both NTSC and PAL.

(U.K. and Europe models only) Sets the output

signal of AV MONITOR OUT jack to YUV or

RGB.

Set the language you usually select for subtitles.

When playing a disc, the subtitles in the selected

language appear first. When the disc does not

contain the selected subtitle language, the subtitle

of that language will not appear.

Disc Lock

Parental level

Enter PIN

Change PIN

TV shape

Access

TV*

Setup

TV System

Video Output

Language

Setting ContentSetting ItemSubmenuMain Menu

Default Sub-title

(Default Subtitle)

Select the country where you use CinemaStation.

Set the language for the On Screen Menu.

Set the language you usually select for audio.

Country

Menu Language

When playing a disc, you hear the audio in the

selected language first. When the disc does not

contain the selected language you selected, it will

play in another language.

Select the output signal for the OPTICAL OUT

jack. The speaker sound changes depending on

the setting for this menu item.

All: Outputs all types of digital signals that

CinemaStation can reproduce.

PCM Only: Outputs the Pro Logic decoded

signal only.

Set Playback Control “On”/“Off”. If set to “Off”,

the Disc Menu does not appear on the TV screen.

Default Audio

Features PBC

Be careful when setting this menu item. If it does not match your TV, the menu and playback screen will not appear

properly or will not appear on the TV. If that happens, refer to “Recover TV settings” below.

This unit can play PAL and NTSC, but your television must match the system used on the disc.

Recover TV settings

When the screen does not appear properly due to TV setting, perform the steps below to recover the setting.

1 Press DVD/CD.

2 Press s for 5 seconds. NTSC<->PAL appears in the CinemaStation Display.

3 Press e to switch the setting. NTSC/PAL SET appears in the CinemaStation Display.

When connecting with AV MONITOR OUT (U.K. and Europe models only)

1 Perform steps 1 and 2 above.

2 Press s again. YUV<->RGB appears in the CinemaStation Display.

3 Press e to switch the setting. YUV/RGB SET appears in the CinemaStation Display.

Audio Menu Digital output

018DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:22 AM96

Appendix

English

Solutions to Common Problems

Be sure to check the points below if CinemaStation doesn’t seem to be

working normally for you. If you notice something wrong that is not listed

below and you have already tried some solutions with no success, turn off

the CinemaStation power, remove the power plug from the outlet and contact

the store where you purchased the product or your nearest YAMAHA sound

products service center and ask for assistance.

General Problems

Power turns on but immediately shuts off.

1 The power plug is not completely plugged

in.

Insert the plug into the outlet firmly.

2 Speaker cable is shorted. When power is

turned on, the protective circuit engages and

shuts the system down.

Make sure that all speaker cables are

correctly connected.

3 CinemaStation received a strong, external

electric shock such as from a lightening bolt

or excessive static electricity.

Put CinemaStation in standby, pull out the

electric cord then wait for about 30 seconds

before reinserting the cord and turning on

the power again.

4 The system cable is not connected properly.

Connect the system cable securely.

No sound.

1 You did not connect the cable properly.

Check your connections.

2 The source you selected is not suitable for

playback.

Choose the correct source using the Input

Selection buttons.

3 You did not connect the Speaker cable

properly.

Check your speaker connections.

4 You turned the sound volume down.

Turn the sound volume up.

5 Sound is muted.

Press MUTE or VOLUME +/- to regain the

sound and adjust the volume to your liking.

6 You inserted a CD-ROM that CinemaStation

cannot play.

Play a source signal that CinemaStation can

play.

No picture.

You did not connect the cable properly.

Check your connections.

The audio suddenly decreased.

The Sleep Time function started working.

Turn the power back on and try playing the

source again.

Sound is too low on one side.

You did not connect the cable properly.

Check your connections.

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:23 AM97

Appendix

No sound except from the Front

Speakers.

1 You are listening to STEREO sound.

Press STEREO and make sure sound field

effect is on.

2 You are playing a source such as Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS that doesn’t

contain a special effect signal.

Select another DSP Program.

3 A digital audio sampling frequency over 48

kHz is input.

A digital audio sampling frequency over 48

kHz only outputs from the Front Speakers.

No sound from the Center Speaker.

1 You turned off the Center Speaker volume

level.

Turn up the Center Speaker volume. See

page 61.

2 You set “* CENTER” in the SET MENU to

“NON”.

Set the Center Speaker correctly. See page

64.

3 You have selected a DSP Program from the

Music group (excluding 5ch Stereo).

Select another DSP Program. See pages 16

and 17.

4 Dolby Digital and DTS sources do not

contain a center channel signal.

No sound from the Surround Speakers.

1 You turned off the Surround Speaker

volume level.

Turn up the Surround Speaker volume. See

page 61.

2 CinemaStation plays a monaural source in

the Theater DSP Program.

Select another DSP Program. See pages 16

and 17.

No sound from the Subwoofer.

1 You set “* BASS” in the SET MENU to

“FRONT” when CinemaStation plays a

Dolby Digital or DTS source.

Set “* BASS” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. See

page 64.

2 You set “* BASS” in the SET MENU to

“FRONT” or “SWFR” when CinemaStation

plays a 2-channel source.

Set “* BASS” to “BOTH”. See page 64.

3 The source doesn’t contain an LFE or other

low tone signal (below 90 Hz).

No low tones.

The Speaker mode you selected in the SET

MENU does not match your speaker.

Set the appropriate Speaker mode based on

the size of the speakers you are using. See

page 63.

Strange humming noises.

You did not connect the pin cable properly.

Check your pin cable connections.

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:23 AM98

Appendix

English

Sound volume will not increase.

The power of the device connected to

CinemaStation’s output jack is not turned

on.

If the power of the device connected to the

output jack is not turned on, playback may

be distorted and volume low. Turn on the

power of the connected device.

Sound field effect cannot be recorded.

It is not possible to record audio enhanced

by a sound field effect.

Audio recording will not work.

1 You are trying to make a digital recording

with an analog source.

Try inputting a digital source.

2 CinemaStation and the recording device are

not connected digitally.

Connect them digitally.

3 You are trying to make an analog recording

with a digital source.

Try inputting an analog source.

4 CinemaStation, the playback device and the

recording device do not share an analog

connection.

Connect them with an analog connection.

5 Some recording devices are not able to

record a digital source such as Dolby Digital

or DTS.

CinemaStation is not working normally.

The internal microcomputer froze up due to

electric shock (lightening bolt or excessive

static electricity) or drop in power supply.

Pull out the AC plug from the outlet and

after about 30 seconds plug it in again.

Digital and high frequency devices create

noise.

CinemaStation is placed too close to a

digital or high frequency device.

Place CinemaStation further away from

such devices.

SET MENU setting content has disappeared.

The power cord has not been connected to

the outlet for over a week or the time set for

the external timer has past, which turned off

the power, more than a week ago.

Set the SET MENU again.

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:23 AM99

100

Appendix

Disc Playback

One of the buttons doesn’t work.

Some discs do not allow certain operations.

Playback does not start when pressing w,

or it immediately stops.

1 When moved from a very cold place to a

warm one, condensation forms on the lens.

Do not use for 1 to 2 hours.

2 You inserted a disc that CinemaStation

cannot play.

3 The disc is dirty.

Wipe the disc clean.

4 The disc is not set in the tray correctly.

Set the disc in the tray correctly. See page

11.

Audio or subtitle language does not switch.

1 The disc does not contain multiple audio or

subtitle languages.

2 Use the Disc Menu to change audio or

subtitle languages. See page 36.

No subtitles appear.

1 DVD does not contain subtitle data.

2 The subtitle setting is off.

Turn on subtitles. See page 13.

3 When using A-B Repeat subtitles sometimes

do not appear before and after points A and

Viewing angle does not change.

You can only use this feature if you are

playing a disc recorded with multiple

angles.

VCR recording does not work.

Almost all DVD discs are copy protected, so

you cannot copy them.

Picture looks poor while fast forwarding or

reversing.

To some degree the picture does not look

normal, but this is not a defect.

The television (monitor) has no picture. (Or

the screen size looks strange.)

1 The setting in the On Screen Menu is not

correct.

Select Setup → TV in the On Screen Menu

to set the menu item correctly.

2 The television cannot handle progressive

input.

Turn off CinemaStation’s progressive output

and change to interlace input on the

television. See page 80.

Part of picture appears double with

progressive output.

The disc content does not match the

progressive output due to the editing method

or other conditions.

Turn off CinemaStation’s progressive output

and change to interlace input on the

television (monitor). See page 80.

The picture quality is poor.

Adjust the picture quality using “Picture” in

the On Screen Menu. See page 95.

No Status display appears.

Under “Features” in the On Screen Menu,

switch the “Status window” to “On”. See

page 95.

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:24 AM100

101

Appendix

English

The disc is ejected as soon as it is inserted.

A disc that cannot be played has been

inserted.

Radio Reception

Preset Tuning does not work.

1 The Preset (memory) has been deleted.

Perform the Preset operation again. See

page 41.

Too much noise blocks out stereo

broadcast.

The radio station is far away from your area

or your antenna is weak.

1 Check your antenna connection. And change

your outdoor FM antenna for a multi-

channel one.

2 Try Manual Tuning. See page 40.

Audio is distorted and the receiver

sensitivity is poor even with outdoor FM

antenna.

You are experiencing multipath reflection

and other radio interference.

Change the antenna’s height, direction or

placement.

Auto Tuning does not work.

The radio station is far away from your area

or your antenna is weak.

1 Try Manual Tuning. See page 40.

2 Change your outdoor FM antenna for a

multi-channel one.

Auto Tuning does not work.

The radio waves are weak or your antenna is

not completely connected.

1 Change the AM Loop antenna’s direction.

See page 38.

2 Try Manual Tuning. See page 40.

Too much noise.

Noise can be related to atmospheric

electricity and lightning, or fluorescent

lights, motors and thermostats attached to

electric devices.

Connecting the outdoor AM antenna and

establishing good grounding will decrease

noise. However, it is difficult to completely

eliminate noise.

Too much noise, especially in the evening.

A television is in use near CinemaStation.

Place the television further away from

CinemaStation.

Cause

Solution

FM/AM

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

“No Disc” appears in the CinemaStation

Display.

No disc is inserted or a disc is inserted

incorrectly.

Set the disc in the tray correctly. See page

11.

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:24 AM101

102

Appendix

The Remote Control does not work.

1 You are outside the Remote Control

operating range.

Operate the Remote Control within 6 m (20

feet) and a 30° angle of the Remote Control

Sensor.

2 The Remote Control Sensor is exposed to

direct sunlight or lighting (inverted

fluorescent lamps).

Change the lighting or CinemaStation’s

orientation.

3 The batteries are worn out.

Replace the batteries with new ones.

4 You did not select the device to operate.

Press the Input Selection buttons to select

the device you want to operate.

Remote Control does not work with

CinemaStation.

You did not select the mode to operate

CinemaStation.

Press DVD/CD, AMP or TUNER on the

Remote Control before starting operation.

Remote Control

A peripheral device does not work with the

Remote Control.

1 You cannot operate a system component.

Use the remote control that came with the

device to operate it.

2 You did not correctly set the manufacturer

code.

• Set the manufacturer code once again.

See page 84.

• Set a different code from the list of codes

for the same manufacturer. See pages 87

and 88.

3 The Remote Control is not compatible with

your equipment.

Use the remote control that came with the

device to operate it.

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

Cause

Solution

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:24 AM102

103

Appendix

English

Information

The table below lists the types of discs you can play on CinemaStation.

Video Discs

Type of Disc

DVD Video

SVCD

(Super Video CD)

Video CD

Disc Logo Mark

DIGITAL VIDEO

Playable discsDestination

Region code of

CinemaStation

ALL

The region code (an ID number assigned to

each market region) is set for normal DVD

players and DVD video discs. CinemaStation

can play the discs with the region codes

shown below on the right. For more details

read the information on the disc jacket.

Advice

DVD region codes

U.S.A.

Canada

ALL

U.K.

Europe

ALL

Australia

ALL

Korea

General

Asia

• Disc logo marks are printed on the disc and the disc jacket.

Disc information

Video CDs made by copying

an MPEG movie file onto a

CD-R or CD-RW.

Type of Disc

Music CD

(Compact disc

digital audio)

Super Audio CD

Disc Logo Mark

Music CDs made by copying

onto a CD-R or CD-RW. Music

in MP3 format can also be

played.

Music Discs

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:24 AM103

104

Appendix

• The following discs cannot be played with this unit.

CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, CDV.

• CinemaStation cannot play a CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVD-

RW, DVD+R or DVD+RW disc that has not been finalized.

Finalizing is a process that prepares a disc for playback on a

compatible device.

• This product can play some types of DVD-R (Video format

only), DVD-RW (Video format only), DVD+R or DVD+RW

discs.

• Only use discs from a reputable manufacturer. Some discs

cannot be played back, depending on recording conditions and

disc characteristics.

• Do not use discs with non-standard shapes or

sizes.

• Some DVD video or video CD discs may operate and

function differently than noted in this manual. That is by

manufacturer design and not a defect in this unit. For more

details read the information on the disc jacket.

• This unit can play the disc types associated with the logos

shown on page 103. (Do not attempt to load any other type of

disc into the unit, or the unit may be damaged.)

• Some discs cannot be played depending on the recording

conditions such as PC environment and application software.

Failure can also result from disc characteristics and condition,

like material quality, scratches or curvature.

Notes

Caution

Handling a disc

• Do not touch the surface of

the disc. Hold a disc by its

edge and center hole.

• Do not leave a disc in the

tray when you are not

playing it.

• Do not write on the disc with

a pencil or other marker.

• Do not stick tape, seals or other attachments to a disc, and do

not bring into contact with glue.

• Do not use a protective cover to prevent scratches.

• Do not use a disc whose surface can be printed with a

commercially available label printer.

• Do not put a disc in a place with

direct sunlight, high temperature,

high humidity or a lot of dust.

• If a disc becomes dirty, wipe it with a

clean, dry cloth from the center out to

the edge. Do not use record cleaner or

paint thinner.

• To avoid malfunction, do not use a commercially available

lens cleaner.

Super Audio CD

CinemaStation can play Super Audio CDs in the same manner as

music CDs. However, CinemaStation cannot use the following

functions for playing Super Audio CDs because the signal circuit is

completely independent.

• DSP Program

• Input Signal Information Display

019DVX-S200-en 2004.04.28, 16:14104

105

Appendix

English

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from

Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,

“Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby

Laboratories.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is

protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other

intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and

other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology

must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for

home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise

authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or

disassembly is prohibited.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System with a built-in

power amplifier

This subwoofer system (NX-SW200) employs Advanced

Yamaha Active Servo Technology which YAMAHA has

developed for reproducing higher quality super-bass sound. This

super-bass sound adds a more realistic, theater-in-the-home

effect to your stereo system.

QD-Bass (Quatre Dispersion Bass) technology uses square,

pyramid-shaped reflective plates to radiate the sound in four

horizontal directions.

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:24 AM105

106

Appendix

Glossary

Bit Stream

A signal that is compressed and changed into digital

format. Then depending on the decoder it can be

processed as 5.1 multi-channel audio.

Channel (ch)

A channel is an audio type that has been divided based

on range and other characteristics.

E.g. 5.1 channel

• Front Speakers, Left (1ch), Right (1ch)

• Center Speaker (1 ch)

• Surround Speakers, Left (1ch), Right (1ch)

• Subwoofer (1 ch x 0.1* = 0.1 ch)

* In contrast to a full 1-channel band, a component designed

to enhance low frequency sound for added effect.

Cinema DSP (Digital Sound Field

Processor)

Dolby Surround and DTS were originally designed for

the movie theater, so playing the same program at home

would produce disparate listening experiences

depending on variables like the room size, walling and

number of speakers.

Yamaha Cinema DSP applies original sound field

technology based on a wealth of real-world data

measurements to reproduce Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby

Digital and DTS sound, combining them with acoustic

scale, depth and tone so that you can experience the

presence of a movie theater at home.

Component Video Signal

A component video signal is separated into one

luminance Y-signal and two chrominance P

B/CB and PR/

R signals. Since each signal is sent independently, color

can be reproduced more faithfully. The component

signal is also called a color-difference signal by the way

it subtracts the luminance signal from the color signals.

Decoder

A device that converts encoded data on DVD and other

media back to its original audio or video signal.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that

gives you completely independent multi-channel audio.

With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2

surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-

range audio channels. With an additional channel

especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency

effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels.

By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers,

more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound

environment can be reproduced, like the rustling of trees

or sound of waves.

Dolby Pro Logic

A surround system that takes a 4-channel signal and

records it as a 2-channel signal, then by way of some

arithmetic processing converts back to an independent 4-

channel signal for playback.

Dolby Pro Logic II

Takes any 2-channel source and reproduces dynamic

5.1-channel surround with excellent separation using

special signal processing. You can experience Dolby Pro

Logic II in MOVIE mode and MUSIC mode for stereo.

You can even enjoy old movies that were only recorded

in 2-channel audio (excluding monaural) in powerful

5.1-channel surround.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

The 5.1-channel surround system adopted by most

movie theaters. With an abundance of audio data, it is

able to provide authentic sounding effects.

Dynamic Range

The difference between the smallest sound that can be

heard above the equipment noise and the biggest sound

that can be heard without distortion is the dynamic

range.

Film and Video Data

In general, DVD media can be classified into the 2 types

below.

• Film Data

Video recorded at 24 frames/second. (The film used

for shooting movies is recorded at 24 frames/second.)

Recently 30 frames/second progressive video has

made its debut.

• Video Data

Video recorded at 30 frames/second.

CinemaStation will automatically recognize whether the

source recorded on DVD is film or video, then select the

best method to convert it into progressive output.

Interlace and Progressive Outputs

Up to now the standard video signal has been NTSC

with 525i (i: interlaced) scan lines. In contrast, 525p (p:

progressive) is a high-density signal with double the

number of scan lines.

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:24 AM106

107

Appendix

English

LFE (Low Frequency Effect) 0.1

Channel

This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.

The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.

It is added to the full-range 5 channels in Dolby Digital

and DTS to enhance low frequency sound for added

effect. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only

enforces a low frequency range.

Linear PCM (LPCM)

A signal that is changed to digital format without

compression. A CD is recorded with 16-bit sound at

44.1kHz, while DVD recording is anywhere from 16 bits

at 48 kHz to 24 bits at 192 kHz, which makes it a higher

quality sound than CD. This signal also has a type called

Packed PCM (P.PCM) that can be compressed without

any loss of data.

Matrix 6.1

CinemaStation incorporates a Matrix 6.1 decoder for

Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel software that

enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround

back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. (The

surround back channel is created from surround left and

right channels, and output from a virtual surround back

speaker.) With this additional channel, you can

experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound

especially scenes with "fly-over" and "fly-around"

effects.

NTSC

NTSC is a video signal system (525 lines, 30 frames per

second) used in North America, Central America, a

number of South American countries, and some Asian

countries, including Japan.

Pan & Scan and Letter Box

In general, DVD Video is produced for viewing on a

wide television screen with an aspect ratio of 16:9. This

means you can now view most material with the

intended aspect ratio on a wide-screen television.

This ratio will not fit on a standard television that has an

aspect ratio of 4:3. Two picture styles, Pan & Scan and

Letterbox, deal with this problem.

• Pan & Scan cuts off the left and right portions of the

picture to fill the screen.

• Letterbox inserts black bands at the top and bottom of

the picture to reproduce an aspect ratio of 16:9.

PAL

PAL is a video signal system (625 lines, 25 frames per

second) used in the United Kingdom, much of the rest of

western Europe, several South American countries, some

Middle East and Asian countries, several African

countries, Australia, New Zealand, and other Pacific

island countries.

Sampling Frequency and Quantized

Bit Rate

When converting an analog signal to digital, the number

of times the signal is sampled per second is called the

sampling frequency while the degree of fineness when

converting the sound level into a numeric value is called

the quantized bit rate.

The frequency band that can be played back is

determined by the sampling rate while the dynamic

range expressing the difference in sound level is

determined by the quantized bit rate. In principle, the

higher the sampling rate, the wider the frequency range

that can be played back. And the higher the quantized bit

rate the finer the sound that can be reproduced.

“SILENT CINEMA”

“SILENT CINEMA” is an original Yamaha system that

reproduces in a pair of headphones the acoustic

personality of sound field programs based on multi-

speakers. Headphone parameters have been set for each

sound field so that natural stereoscopic sound can be

expressed and enjoyed through headphones.

S-Video Signal

With S-video the video signal that was normally

transmitted using a pin cable is separated and

transmitted as a luminance Y-signal and chrominance C-

signal through an S video cable. Connecting with an S

VIDEO jack you can enjoy recording and playback with

more beautiful images.

Title, Chapter (DVD Video)

DVD video lets you divide a disc in a big way by titles

or a small way by chapters. Each division is either called

a title number or a chapter number.

Track (CD/Video CD)

A CD or Video CD can be divided into a number of

segments (tracks). Each division is called a title number.

Virtual Cinema DSP (Digital Sound

Field Processor)

Reproduces a surround speaker sound field to let you

enjoy virtual Center and Surround L/R Speakers with

only two Front L/R Speakers.

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:24 AM107

108

Appendix

Index

5ch Stereo ...................................................................... 17

A-B Repeat .................................................................... 35

Action ............................................................................ 17

Changing the Order of Preset Stations .......................... 43

CinemaStation Display brightness ................................ 92

Classic Hall .................................................................... 17

Connecting a CD or MD recorder ................................. 50

Connecting a Game Console ......................................... 46

Connecting a VCR ......................................................... 46

Connecting the Antennas ............................................... 38

Connecting the Speakers ................................................. 8

Connecting the TV .......................................................... 8

Connect a TV to an audio input ................................. 47

Connecting with S-video ................................................. 9

D. Range ........................................................................ 91

Delay Time .................................................................... 72

Digital audio jacks ......................................................... 51

Disc information .......................................................... 103

Discs this unit cannot play back .............................. 104

Handling a disc ........................................................ 104

Music Discs ............................................................. 103

Video Discs .............................................................. 103

Disc Lock ...................................................................... 83

Disc Menu ..................................................................... 36

Display Set .................................................................... 92

Dolby Digital Surround EX disc ................................... 65

Drama ............................................................................ 17

DSP Program ................................................................. 17

DTS ES disc .................................................................. 65

DVD region codes ....................................................... 103

Fastener ......................................................................... 54

Finding the Best DSP Effect .......................................... 16

Frame Advance .............................................................. 29

G, H

Game ............................................................................. 17

HP Tone CTRL .............................................................. 91

I, J

Input Assign ................................................................... 92

Input Mode .................................................................... 92

Input Modes ................................................................... 77

Jazz Club ....................................................................... 17

L/R Balance ................................................................... 91

LEF Level ...................................................................... 91

Live Sports .................................................................... 17

M, N

Matrix 6.1 ...................................................................... 65

MP3 ............................................................................... 37

Music Video ................................................................... 17

Night Listening .............................................................. 71

No Disc ........................................................................ 101

Non-skid pad ........................................................... 54, 55

O, P

On Screen Menu ............................................................ 24

On Screen Menu Guide ............................................. 95

Using the On Screen Menu ........................................ 93

Original Dolby and DTS Sound .................................... 74

Parental Control ............................................................. 81

Placing the Speakers ........................................................ 7

Playback Control (PBC) ................................................ 36

PRO LOGIC II Movie ................................................... 67

PRO LOGIC II Music ................................................... 67

Pro Logic II Music setting ......................................... 68

Program Play ................................................................. 31

Progressive Scan ............................................................ 80

Reassign input jacks ...................................................... 92

Recording Audio from CinemaStation .......................... 53

Remote Control ............................................................. 21

Amp Mode ................................................................. 22

DVD/CD Mode .......................................................... 23

Tuner Mode ................................................................ 21

Using the Remote Control ......................................... 21

Repeat Play .................................................................... 34

Rock Concert ................................................................. 17

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:24 AM108

109

Appendix

English

SA-CD Delay ................................................................ 91

Sci-Fi (Science Fiction) ................................................. 17

Selecting Radio Stations ................................................ 39

Auto Tuning ............................................................... 39

Manual Tuning ........................................................... 40

Preset Tuning ............................................................. 43

SET MENU ................................................................... 91

Setting Channels in Advance (Preset) ........................... 41

Auto Preset ................................................................ 41

Manual Preset ............................................................ 42

Setting the Manufacturer Code ...................................... 84

“SILENT CINEMA” ..................................................... 70

Sleep Timer .................................................................... 79

Slow Advance/Reverse .................................................. 29

SP Delay ........................................................................ 91

Speaker Mode ................................................................ 63

Speaker Size .................................................................. 63

Speaker Volume Level ............................................. 59, 61

5ch Stereo DSP Program ........................................... 62

Spectacle ........................................................................ 17

Stereo playback ............................................................. 17

Super Audio CD .......................................................... 104

Test Tone ........................................................................ 59

Theater ........................................................................... 17

Time Search ................................................................... 30

To change discs .............................................................. 12

Tuner Step...................................................................... 92

Types of Input Signals ................................................... 76

Virtual Cinema DSP ...................................................... 69

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:24 AM109

110

Appendix

Specifications

AUDIO SECTION

Minimum RMS Output Power

FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R

1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6Ω ........................................... 85 W

U.S.A. and Canada models

20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6Ω ........................ 80 W

Maximum Power (EIAJ) (Asia, Korea and General models

only)

FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R

1 kHz, 10% THD, 6Ω ........................................... 100 W

Total Harmonic Distortion

FRONT L/R (20 W, 1 kHz) .................. Less than 0.05 %

Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network, 200 mV shorted)

............................................................................... 95 dB

Input Sensitivity

VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2 (VIDEO), VCR, MD/CD-R

................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ

Output Level (when 200mV is input)

REC OUT ............................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ

PRE OUT (SUBWOOFER) ....................................... 4 V

Headphones .............................................. 220 mV/100 Ω

VIDEO SECTION

Video Signal Level

Video ............................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

S Video (Y/C) ......................... 1 Vp-p/0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω

Component (Y/P

B, PR) ................. 1 Vp-p/0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................... 50 dB

TUNER SECTION

FM Tuning Range

U.S.A. and Canada models ................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz

Other models ...................................... 87.5 to 108.0 MHz

AM Tuning Range

U.S.A., Canada and Korea models ....... 530 to 1710 kHz

U.K., Europe and Australia models ...... 531 to 1611 kHz

Asia and General models ...... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz

SPEAKERS

Satellite Speakers (Front and Surround Speakers)

Model Name ..................................................... NX-S200

Type

...............

2-way acoustic suspension magnetic shielding type

Driver

....

Tweeter: 2.5 cm (1 inch) balanced dome magnetic shielding type

Woofer: 5 cm (2 inch) cone magnetic shielding type

Impedance ................................................................... 6Ω

Center Speaker

Model Name .................................................... NX-C200

Type

...............

2-way acoustic suspension magnetic shielding type

Driver

....

Tweeter: 2.5 cm (1 inch) balanced dome magnetic shielding type

Woofer: 5 cm (2 inch) cone magnetic shielding type

Impedance ................................................................... 6Ω

Subwoofer

Model Name ................................................. NX-SW200

Type

........

Advanced YAMAHA Active Servo Technology system

Driver

................ 20 cm (8 inch) cone, magnetic shielding type

GENERAL

Power Supply

U.S.A. and Canada models ................... AC 120 V/60 Hz

Australia model ..................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz

U.K. and Europe models ....................... AC 230 V/50 Hz

Korea model .......................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz

Asia model ............................... AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz

General model .......................... AC 110-120 V, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption

DVR-S200 ............................................................ 130 W

NX-SW200 ............................................................. 85 W

Standby Power Consumption

DVR-S200

Asia and General models ....................................... 0.5 W

Other models ........................................................ 0.35 W

Laser Pickup

Type .................................. Semiconductor laser GaAlAs

Wave length ............ 650 nm (DVD), 790 nm (VCD/CD)

Output Power .... 1.45 mW (DVD), 1.31 mW (VCD/CD)

Dimensions (W ✕ H ✕ D)

DVR-S200 ...................................... 360 ✕ 80 ✕ 361 mm

(14

/16⬙ x 3

/32⬙ x 14

/32⬙)

NX-SW200 ................................... 232 ✕ 415 ✕ 388 mm

/8⬙ x 16

/32⬙ x 15

/32⬙)

NX-C200 ........................................... 300 ✕ 72 ✕ 81 mm

(11

/16⬙ x 2

/32⬙ x 3

/16⬙)

NX-S200 ........................................... 72 ✕ 230 ✕ 81 mm

/32⬙ x 9

/16⬙ x 3

/16⬙)

Weight

DVR-S200 ........................................ 6.5 kg (14 lbs 5 oz)

NX-SW200 ....................................... 9.6 kg (21 lbs 3 oz)

NX-C200 ............................................. 1.1 kg (2 lbs 6 oz)

NX-S200 ............................................. 1.0 kg (2 lbs 3 oz)

Operating Temperature Range ........ +5 to +35°C (41 to 95°F)

Operating Humidity Range ...... 5 to 90% (No Condensation)

Accessories ........................................................... See page 6.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

019DVX-S200-en 04.3.1, 11:24 AM110

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

DVD HOME THEATER SOUND SYSTEM

DVX-S200

(DVR-S200+NX-S200+NX-C200+NX-SW200)

OWNER’S MANUAL

U B

DVD/Super Audio CD RECEIVER

DVR-S200

Printed in Malaysia WB85540-3

cv_DVX-S200_UB.p65 2004.05.26, 13:031

Documenttranscriptie

UB DVD HOME THEATER SOUND SYSTEM DVX-S200 (DVR-S200+NX-S200+NX-C200+NX-SW200) DVD/Super Audio CD RECEIVER DVR-S200 © 2003 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA cv_DVX-S200_UB.p65 1 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia OWNER’S MANUAL WB85540 03.10.9, 3:26 PM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • 1 Read these instructions. 2 Keep these instructions. 3 Heed all warnings. 4 Follow all instructions. 5 Do not use this apparatus near water. 6 Clean only with dry cloth. 7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear or the bottom of this unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. 15 Be sure to allow spaces of at least 10 cm above, behind and on both sides of DVR-S200, and at least 20 cm above, behind and on both sides of NX-SW200. 16 Do not place the following objects on this unit: A vessel with water in it. If the vessel falls by vibrations and water spills, it may cause damage to the unit, and/or you may get an electric shock. i DVX-S200_UB.p65 2 03.10.20, 0:46 PM FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE : DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT : When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE : This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. English ii DVX-S200_UB.p65 3 03.10.20, 0:46 PM CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This product is a DVD home theater sound system consisting of the components shown on the table. Please check to make sure that all of the components listed in the table are included. NX-SW200 Do not hold near the protrusions on the bottom of subwoofer. There protrusions are built to protect the woofer, but they can catch your finger and cause bodily injury. ● The name plate is located on the bottom of the unit. Model name Category No. of pcs DVR-S200 DVD/Super Audio CD RECEIVER 1 NX-S200 Satellite Speaker (for front/surround) 4 NX-C200 Center speaker 1 NX-SW200 Subwoofer 1 iii DVX-S200_UB.p65 4 03.10.20, 0:46 PM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 Condensation will form when the surrounding temperature changes suddenly. Disconnect the power cord from the outlet, then leave the unit alone. 21 When using the unit for a long time, the unit may become warm. Turn the power off, then leave the unit alone for cooling. DVR-S200 This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES003. DANGER When this unit is plugged to the wall outlet, do not place your eyes close to the opening of the disc tray and other openings to look into inside. The laser component in this product is capable of emitting radiation exceeding the limit for Class 1. DVR-S200 The name plate is located on the bottom of the unit. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. ■ For U.K. customers If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the instructions described below. Note • The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. ■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: Blue: NEUTRAL Brown: LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug. 1 DVX-S200_UB.p65 5 03.10.20, 0:46 PM English 18 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place with at least 10 cm on the top, 10 cm on the left and right, and 10 cm at the back of DVR-S200, and 20 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm at the back of NX-SW200 — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. Be sure to read the “Solutions to Common Problems” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. Do not place much pressure against the Subwoofer port (front opening). The port or the unit may fall resulting in injury. Do not place anything fragile beside the Subwoofer, as air pressure is produced that may break it, result in malfunction or cause injury. In a few steps, a whole new world of DVD will open up. Settle into your favorite place on the sofa and let the show begin. LET’S GET THINGS READY! ➡Page 6, “Preparation” Decide on a place for the speakers, perform a few simple connections, and that’s all there is to it. • Connecting Speakers and TV to CinemaStation couldn’t be easier. • Connecting the Speaker Cables with one touch colored connectors. Come on, let’s watch a DVD! ➡Page 10, “Basic Operations” Transform your room into a home theater in 3 steps. Connect Speakers and TV Play a disc Select a sound field • Sound fields to match the movie you are viewing and experience the feeling of being there. • Progressive scan technology for enjoying high-quality video even on a large screen. Double and triple your enjoyment by CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT. ➡Page 46, “Using Other Equipment” • Enhance the feeling of movement with DSP Programs when you play video games. • Listen to and record CD-R and MiniDisc media. • View and dub video media. 2 001DVX-S200-en 2 04.3.1, 11:08 AM Enjoy playing A VARIETY OF DISCS! ➡Page 28, “Playing Video and Music Discs” In 3 short steps, play everything from commercial CDs to your own homemade discs. Connect Speakers Play a disc Select a sound field • Enjoy playing all types of discs including audio and video CDs, Super Audio CDs and MP3 music recorded on CD-Rs. • Create the sound and ambience to match the music you are listening to, whether it be the excitement of a nightclub or the acoustics of a concert hall. Let’s listen to an FM/AM BROADCAST! ➡Page 38, “Listening to the Radio” In 2 quick steps you can enjoy live radio broadcasts. Connect Speakers and Antennas Select a channel • In addition to Auto Tuning, you can use various controls including Auto Preset for FM channels. It’s time to TAKE YOUR LISTENING EXPERIENCE UP A NOTCH! ➡Page 54, “Creating the Best Listening Space” English • With the Speakers you can create a sound space to match the listening environment of the room. • The Matrix 6.1 Decoder provides virtual surround back speakers for experiencing a remarkable acoustic presence. • “SILENT CINEMA” provides an incredible listening presence with headphones. 3 001DVX-S200-en 3 04.3.1, 11:08 AM CONTENTS Basic Preparation Playing back a DVD Introduction Page 6 About this Manual Page 6 Supplied Accessories Page 6 Preparing the Remote Control Page 7 Preparing the Speakers Page 7 Placing the Speakers Page 7 Connecting the Speakers and TV Page 8 Basic Operations Viewing a DVD Page 10 Useful Features Page 13 Selecting the Audio Language Page 13 Selecting the Subtitle Language Page 13 Moving Forward and Backward Page 13 Adjusting the Audio Volume Page 13 Pausing Playback Page 13 Switching the Viewing Angle Page 14 Restarting Playback from the Stop Position (Memory Resume) Page 14 Enhancing the Sound Presence Page 15 Turning off the Sound Page 15 Controlling the DVDs Your Children Can View Page 15 Enhancing Video Quality Page 15 Answers to Common Problems Page 15 Advanced Sound Presence Finding the Best DSP Effect Page 16 Advanced Features Names and Functions of Parts Page 18 Top and Front Page 18 CinemaStation Display Page 20 Remote Control Features Page 21 Amp Mode Button Names and Functions Page 22 DVD/CD Mode Button Names and Functions Page 23 Using the On Screen Menu Page 24 Selecting the Media Device Selecting the Equipment Page 26 Playing Video and Music Discs Playback Methods Page 28 Selecting a Scene or Tune Page 28 Customizing Playback Order (Program Play) Page 31 Repeating a Disc or Track (Repeat Play) Page 34 Using a Disc Menu Page 36 MP3 Playback Features Page 37 Playing a Super Audio CD Page 37 4 001DVX-S200-en 4 04.3.1, 11:08 AM Listening to the Radio Connecting the Antennas Page 38 Listening to the Radio Page 39 Selecting the Radio Tuner Page 39 Selecting Radio Stations Page 39 Setting Channels in Advance (Preset) Page 41 Selecting a Preset Station (Preset Tuning) Page 43 Changing the Order of Preset Stations Page 43 Receiving RDS Stations (U.K. and Europe models only) Page 44 Using Other Equipment Connecting Video Equipment Page 46 Connecting a Game Console or VCR Page 46 Operating a VCR Page 48 Playing a Video Game or Operating a Video Camera Page 48 Dubbing from a Video Camera to a VCR Page 49 Connecting Audio Equipment Page 50 Connecting a CD or MD Recorder Page 50 Playing a CD or MD Page 53 Recording Audio from CinemaStation Page 53 Creating the Best Listening Space Placing the Speakers (NX-P200) Page 54 Placing the Center Speaker Page 54 Placing the Subwoofer Page 54 Placing the Front and Surround Speakers Page 55 Using Commercially Available Speakers or Cables Page 57 Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level Page 59 Adjusting the Speaker Balance with a Test Tone Page 59 Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level During Playback Page 61 Setting the Speaker Size Page 63 Setting the Speaker Mode Page 63 More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Selecting DSP Program Effects Page 65 Types of Input Signals Page 76 Checking Sound Information (Input Signal Information Display) Page 76 Switching Input Modes Page 78 Additional Features Using the Sleep Timer Page 79 Enjoying High-Quality Video Progressive Scan (NTSC only) Page 80 Protecting Your Children from Undesirable Material Page 81 Setting the Password and Parental Control Level Page 81 Locking a Disc Page 83 Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control Storing Manufacturer Codes in the Remote Control Page 84 Setting the Manufacturer Code Page 84 Available Operations Page 85 Manufacturer Code List Page 87 Using the SET MENU Using the SET MENU Page 89 SET MENU List Page 89 Navigating the SET MENU Page 90 Using the On Screen Menu Using the On Screen Menu Page 93 Navigating the On Screen Menu Page 93 On Screen Menu Guide Page 95 Appendix Solutions to Common Problems Page 97 General Problems Page 97 Disc Playback Page 100 Radio Reception Page 101 Remote Control Page 102 Information Page 103 Glossary Page 106 Index Page 108 Specifications Page 110 English Using Matrix 6.1 Page 65 Using All Speakers for CD or Video Playback Page 67 Using Front Speakers Only for DSP Program (Virtual Cinema DSP) Page 69 Using a DSP Program with Headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) Page 70 Using a DSP Program with Low Volume (Night Listening) Page 71 Changing the Delay Time of a DSP Program Page 72 Reproducing the Original Dolby and DTS Sound Page 74 Reproducing Stereo Sound Page 75 Types of Input Signals CONTENTS Connecting the FM Antenna Page 38 Connecting the AM Loop Antenna Page 38 5 001DVX-S200-en 5 04.3.1, 11:08 AM Preparation Introduction Your DVD Home Theater Sound System DVX-S200 consists of the following components. DVD/Super Audio CD Receiver (DVR-S200) 1 unit Speaker Set (NX-P200) Satellite Speakers (Front, Surround) (NX-S200) 4 units Center Speaker (NX-C200) 1 unit Subwoofer (NX-SW200) 1 unit Explanations in this Owner’s Manual are based on the DVX-S200 (DVD/Super Audio CD Receiver (DVR-S200) and Speaker Set (NX-P200)). If you use speakers other than NX-P200, make sure to set the speaker size and volume level in advance. →Page 63, “Setting the Speaker Size” →Page 59, “Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level” About this Manual ● Advice explains additional operating tips that you may find useful. ● Please... indicates an operation that you should definitely perform. ● In this manual, operations that can be performed on either the DVD/Super Audio CD Receiver or Remote Control are explained using the Remote Control. ● In this manual, Remote Control descriptions and illustrations are based on models other than those in the U.K. or Europe. Any exceptions are clearly stated. ● This Owner’s Manual was printed before final product development. After printing, some product specifications may change due to operational upgrades and other reasons. In this case, the specifications of the product itself will take precedence over the specifications in this manual. ● In some cases, graphics or terms used may differ slightly from the actual product or packaging to facilitate explanation. Supplied Accessories Make sure all of the following accessories are in the box. NX-P200: NX-S200, NX-C200, NX-SW200 DVR-S200 Remote Control Batteries (2) (AA, R06, UM-3) AM Loop Antenna Subwoofer Cable (1 pin, 5 m, (1)) Mounting Brackets (Front, Surround Speakers (4)) DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT SURR SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH Screws (M4 ✕ 10) (Front, Surround Speakers (4)) A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET Indoor FM Antenna ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE (U.S.A., Canada, Korea, Asia and General models) (Europe, U.K. and Australia models) Video Pin Cable System Control Cable (5 m (1)) Fasteners (Center Speaker (2)) AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA Speaker Cables (Surround: 15 m (2), Front, Center: 5 m (3)) Non-Skid Pads (Subwoofer, 1 Set (4)) 6 002DVX-S200-en 6 04.3.1, 11:09 AM Non-Skid Pads (Front, Surround Speakers, 4 Sets (16)) Preparation Preparing the Remote Control Put the batteries in the Remote Control. Check +/polarity B asic Press the h mark and slide off the back cover. Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R06, UM-3) into the battery compartment. Close the back cover. Press h Preparation Preparing the Speakers The Front Speakers, Surround Speakers, Center Speaker and Subwoofer have special roles based on the type of sound each produces. • The Front Speakers produce front channel sound (stereo) and sound effects. • The Surround Speakers produce surround sound and sound effects. • The Center Speaker produces sound oriented toward the center of the screen such as dialog or vocals. • The Subwoofer produces bass sounds and the LFE signal contained in Dolby Digital and DTS. Placing the Speakers Front Speakers (L, R) Place the speakers as shown in the diagram below. Place the Front Left and Right Speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center Speaker Front Speaker (R) Front Speaker (L) Surround Speaker (R) Center Speaker Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker as close to the monitor as possible (such as directly over or under the monitor) and centrally between the front speakers. Surround Speakers (L, R) 1.8 m (6 feet) Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, approximately 1.8 m (6 feet) above the floor. Subwoofer Surround Speaker (L) Subwoofer English Advice The position of the Subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the Subwoofer near the Front Speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Note • You can secure the Center Speaker, Front/Surround Speakers or Subwoofer in place using fasteners or non-skid pads. You can hang the Front and Surround Speakers from the wall or attach them to optional speaker stands. See page 54, “Placing the Speakers (NX-P200)”. • If the television (monitor) image is distorted, place the speakers away from the television. 7 002DVX-S200-en 7 04.3.1, 1:07 PM Preparation Connecting the Speakers and TV Please ... Connect the power cord after connecting the speakers and TV. Connect the cable core with the color band near the tip to the + connector. Be careful, if you reverse the cables, the sound will be unnatural. 3 2 Cable core Color band Speaker Cable (Red) 1 Lever 1 Press the lever down. 2 Insert the speaker cable core into the hole. 3 Release the lever and the lever will snap back into place. Connect the plug to the jack of the same color. Insert it firmly. Red, green, white: Face the tab upwards and insert. Gray, blue: Face the tab downwards and insert. Red Green Tab White Blue Gray Front Right Speaker Tab Speaker Cable (Gray) Surround Right Speaker Please Please ... • Do not allow the speaker cable cores to touch each other. • Do not use excessive force when inserting plugs, connectors or jacks as they can be damaged. 8 003DVX-S200-en 8 04.3.1, 11:10 AM Preparation TV Preparation Front Left Speaker Center Speaker Turn off the TV before connecting. Speaker Cable (Green) VIDEO IN Speaker Cable (White) VIDEO Connect the power cord after making all other connections. Video Pin Cable Connect to the S-video or Y/PB/PR jack on the TV. DVD/Super Audio CD Receiver S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) R FRONT COMPONENT VIDEO (480p/480i) (DVD ONLY) Y SPEAKERS PB PR AM ANT MONITOR OUT VIDEO L CENTER FRONT GND IN L OUT FM ANT R SURROUND 75 UNBAL SURROUND IN VIDEO 1 SPEAKER IMPEDANCE: 6 MIN. Speaker Cable (Blue) System Control Cable IN OUT VCR IN IN VIDEO 2 OUT MD/CD-R SUBWOOFER OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTOR Subwoofer Cable AV AM ANT GND Surround Left Speaker SYSTEM INPUT CONNECTOR ful Use English Connect the power cord after making all other connections. AV MONITOR OUT (U. K. and Europe models only) If your monitor has only one jack for Subwoofer video input, you can use CinemaStation’s SCART output jack for connecting directly to the monitor. This connection provides the best picture quality. See page 96 when the screen does not appear properly. tip Connecting with S-video Use a commercially available S-video cable to connect the S VIDEO MONITOR OUTPUT to your TV’s S-video input. 9 003DVX-S200-en 9 04.3.1, 11:10 AM Basic Operations Viewing a DVD It’s time to play a DVD. Select a disc and begin from step 1. Turn on the TV. Use the TV remote control or power switch. Switch TV Input. Use the TV remote control or the input switch button on the television. For example, switch to video input 1 if CinemaStation is connected to video input 1. Press POWER. POWER DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS NIGHT AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E CinemaStation turns on. The CinemaStation Display lights up. Press f on the CinemaStation. The disc tray slides out. 10 004DVX-S200-en 10 04.3.1, 11:10 AM Basic Operations Basic Operations Place a disc in the tray. Please ... • Place the disc with the label side facing up. • Hold the disc by its edge and hole in the center to avoid touching the surface of the disc. Press f on the CinemaStation. The disc tray slides in. Press DVD/CD. DVD/CD AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS English MOVIE GAME CINEMA CinemaStation enters DVD/CD mode. 11 004DVX-S200-en 11 04.3.1, 11:10 AM Basic Operations Press p. TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL The DVD starts playing. Press s to stop playback. NIGHT A B C D E SW CENTER SURR SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET ON SCREEN PRESET MENU SET MENU To change discs Press f on CinemaStation to eject the disc. Set another disc in the tray and press f. Press POWER to turn off. POWER DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E Eject the disc before turning off the power. After finished playing, press f on CinemaStation to eject the disc. Then press f once more to close the disc tray. 12 004DVX-S200-en 12 04.3.1, 11:10 AM Basic Operations Useful Handy Features Features DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV Selecting the Audio Language /DTS ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT SURR SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU Basic Operations 1 While holding down SHIFT, press AUDIO. 2 While viewing the TV 1 ja screen, press h or g to Audio 2 ja select the audio language 3 en you want. The audio language changes each time you press AUDIO while holding This selection is available when the DVD disc down SHIFT. contains multi-language audio. Press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen Menu. AUDIO SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST DVR-S200 WB56620 VOLUME TV VOL POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Selecting the Subtitle Language 1 While holding down SHIFT, press SUBTITLE. 1 ja 2 While viewing the TV screen, press h or g to Sub-title 2 ja select the subtitle lan3 en guage you want. Select “None” to turn off the subtitle. This selection is available when the DVD disc The subtitle language contains multi-language subtitles. changes each time you press SUBTITLE while holding down SHIFT. Press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen Menu. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL NIGHT Moving Forward and Backward To fast reverse: Press e. To fast forward: Press r. To move to the start of the currently playing or previous chapter: Press t. To move to the start of the next chapter: Press y. SET MENU CH CH ENTER A-B SURR SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU TEST CH ENTER CH VOLUME TV VOL MUTE VCR TUNER Adjusting the Audio Volume SPORTS VIDEO 1 Press + to increase the volume and - to decrease. VIDEO 2 GAME NIGHT SW REPEAT A-B CENTER SURR SHIFT Pausing Playback TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP CINEMA PRESET PRESET English MUSIC RETURN STATUS AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R REPEAT CENTER RETURN STATUS MOVIE SW Press d. To resume playback press w. ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH STATUS 004DVX-S200-en 13 04.3.1, 11:10 AM ENTER CH RETURN 13 Basic Operations Useful Handy Handy Features Features Features Switching the Viewing Angle While holding down SHIFT, press ANGLE. The video angle changes each time you press ANGLE while holding down SHIFT. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV 2 AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER 3 /DTS Angle 4 NIGHT SURR 5 SHIFT Advice TV INPUT TV CH • You can change the angle with h, g, or Number buttons, instead of ANGLE. Press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen Menu. A B C D E SLEEP This selection is available when the DVD disc contains multi-angle content. PRESET PRESET DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Restarting Playback from the Stop Position (Memory Resume) SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH Pressing a during playback enables Memory Resume. CinemaStation memorizes the stop position. Pressing w starts playing back the disc from the stop position. A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST TV VOL VOLUME 14 004DVX-S200-en 14 04.3.1, 11:11 AM Basic Operations Useful Features Try It Out! Enhancing the Sound Presence SET MENU CH CH ENTER Basic Operations CinemaStation is loaded with a variety of DSP Programs, so you can experience from the raw excitement of a rock concert to the breathtaking space of a cinemagraphic spectacle. See page 16, “Finding the Best DSP Effect”. RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL Turning off the Sound MUTE AMP Press MUTE on the Remote Control. Press it again to turn on the sound. DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA Controlling the DVDs Your Children Can View You can set the Parental Control level and lock discs. See page 81, “Protecting Your Children from Undesirable Material”. Enhancing Video Quality CinemaStation uses progressive image playback (available only for NTSC Signal Output) to render the full beauty of DVD video. You can connect a television that has component video input jacks to CinemaStation’s COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and enjoy progressive scan imaging. See page 80, “Enjoying High-Quality Video”. Answers to Common Problems No subtitles appear I cannot change the audio or subtitle language Check the disc jacket to make sure subtitles are available. The disc may have only one audio and one subtitle language. English I followed each step correctly but the disc doesn’t play. Some discs have a Disc Menu or DVD Menu. Your settings may change if you use this type of menu. 15 004DVX-S200-en 15 04.3.1, 11:11 AM Sound Presence Finding the Best DSP Effect Changing the DSP effect based on listening and viewing content Select a DSP Program for the movie or music and experience the sound of a movie theater or concert hall. Follow the chart below to select the DSP Program that offers the acoustic qualities you want. Advice • Experiment with different sound field effects until you find the DSP Program that you feel best matches your source. • CinemaStation has other DSP Programs not listed below. See page 65, “Selecting DSP Program Effects”. • CinemaStation cannot use any DSP Program when playing a Super Audio CD. What do you want to do? Next selection An action-packed thriller Romantic or comic drama Popular science fiction with loads of effects Watch a movie Grand spectacle Experience the digital surround sound of a movie theater Watch live entertainment Feel the excitement on the big stage Classical concert Live jazz Listen to music Rock Concert Home party Watch a sports broadcast Baseball and soccer Play video games Feel the power and momentum of the game 16 005DVX-S200-en 16 04.3.1, 11:11 AM Sound Presence Finding the right DSP Program Action Enhances the stereoscopic effect for a thrilling sense of presence only found in an action movie. Remote Control Press MOVIE repeatedly to display DSP Programs. MOVIE Sci-Fi (Science Fiction) Fills the space with music and sound that have an eerie sense of reality. Suitable for serious science fiction that has a good story line. Action Drama Sound Presence Drama Expresses surround sounds softly so that voice and dialog are clear and crisp. Selecting a DSP Program Sci-Fi Spectacle Expresses super-wide spaces. Suitable for movies that have a powerful visual impact. Theater Preserves the power of Dolby or DTS Surround for experiencing the rich acoustical presence of a movie theater. Music Video Magnifies the feeling of listening to live rock or jazz in a concert hall. The screen image and sound field space stretch out to the fullest, engulfing you in an atmosphere of excitement. Spectacle Theater Remote Control Press MUSIC repeatedly to display DSP Programs. MUSIC Music Video Classic Hall (The Munich Philharmonic Hall) Puts you in a front row seat at the Munich Philharmonic Hall, surrounded in calm, voluptuous sound. Classic Hall Jazz Club Rock Concert Jazz Club (The Bottom Line) Reproduces the acoustics of sitting right in front of the stage at The Bottom Line, a popular New York City jazz club. Experience the lively, realistic throb of a wide stage. Rock Concert (The Roxy Theater) Recreates the acoustic personality of a nightclub seating for an audience of about 460. 5ch Stereo Remote Control SPORTS Press SPORTS. 5ch Stereo Fills the space with sound and allows all listeners to enjoy the same high-quality sound no matter where they are sitting or standing in the room. A DSP Program that is especially suitable for home parties. Remote Control Press GAME. GAME English Live Sports In a live stereo sports broadcast, announcer voices are central, engulfed in the cheers and emotional whirl of the stadium. Game Gives TV games extra depth and surround. You can enjoy TV games with monaural or stereo sound. 17 005DVX-S200-en 17 04.3.1, 11:11 AM Advanced Features Names and Functions of Parts Top and Front Buttons for amplifier and disc operations a Stops disc playback. t/e, r/y Selects the previous/next track or chapter. Continue pressing to fast forward or fast reverse. d Pauses disc playback. INPUT PROGRESSIVE (NTSC only) Selects an input source. Press this button until you find the source you want to watch or listen to. Selects an audio input signal. You can set the priority level for the audio input signals when the equipment is connected to both OPTICAL IN jack and AUDIO IN jack. (See page 78.) Switches DVD playback between progressive and interlace outputs. (See page 80.) f Opens and closes the disc tray. STANDBY/ON Switches the unit between ON and STANDBY. No audio will be heard for a few seconds after power is switched on. STANDBY mode uses a little energy to receive an infrared signal from the Remote Control. VOLUME Adjusts the overall sound volume. Turn right to increase the volume and left to decrease the volume. Disc tray Receives your disc. DSP button operation Display Action Displays DSP Program names, setting values and playback information. Drama Sci-Fi Spectacle DSP Theater w Music Video Starts disc playback. Classic Hall Jazz Club Remote Control Sensor Rock Concert Receives signals from the Remote Control. 5ch Stereo Game Holding down DSP. PL Normal Press DSP. Live Sports PL II Movie PL II Music STEREO (phones) jack Connects your headphones. When selecting a DSP Program, you can enjoy “SILENT CINEMA”. (See page 70.) 18 006DVX-S200-en 18 04.3.1, 11:12 AM Selects a DSP Program. Press this button until you find the DSP Program you want. To select another DSP Program group, hold down this button. See the diagram shown on the left. Advanced Features Buttons for tuner operations Press INPUT on CinemaStation or press TUNER on the Remote Control to select Tuner mode. In Tuner mode, the buttons below function as described. A/B/C/D/E Selects preset groups (A, B, C, D, E) for FM/AM stations. (See page 41.) PRESET/BAND Selects a Preset Number. Searches a radio station. (See page 39.) Selects FM or AM tuning mode or Preset mode. (See page 39.) A dvanced Advanced Features d PRESET/TUNING u Advanced Features MEMORY Stores received stations for Preset Tuning. (See page 41.) AUTO/MAN’L Switches between Auto Tuning and Manual Tuning modes. (See pages 39 and 40.) Press this button to set CinemaStation to Auto Tuning mode (AUTO indicator lights up), or press this button to set CinemaStation to Manual Tuning mode (AUTO indicator goes out). About memory backup • Volume • Subwoofer, Center and Surround L/R Speakers output levels (See page 59.) • SET MENU options (See page 89.) • Sleep Timer settings (See page 79.) • Preset radio stations (See page 41.) • DSP Program settings Delay Time (See page 72.) Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings (See page 68.) English If you disconnect the power cord from the outlet, CinemaStation will memorize the settings listed to the right for about a week. Set them again if those settings are erased after a week. 19 006DVX-S200-en 19 04.3.1, 11:12 AM Advanced Features CinemaStation Display PROGRESSIVE DSP VIRTUAL Lights up when PROGRESSIVE is activated. Lights up when a DSP sound field program is selected. Lights up when Virtual Cinema DSP is enabled. Lights up when an internal decoder is working. Lights up when using a DSP Program with headphones for “SILENT CINEMA”. Lights up when a DSP Program is selected. DIGITAL PL DSP MATRIX PCM TITLE TRACK CHAP PROGRESSIVE DVD VCD CD Lights up when using the Sleep Timer. “SILENT CINEMA” indicator DSP Program indicator Decoder indicator SLEEP PROG SLEEP VIRTUAL SILENT MULTI2CH REP A-B ALL AUTO ST MEMORY PS TUNED PTY RT CT PTY HOLD 888888888888 Main Display PCM Lights up when playing PCM signal such as CDs. Shows Input Source and DSP Program names, Radio Station Frequency, Preset Numbers and other info. Shows chapter or track number, elapsed time and other info during disc playback. TUNED Lights up when receiving an FM/AM broadcast. Program, Repeat indicator PROG: Lights up during Program Play. REP: Lights up during Repeat Play of a title, chapter or track. REP ALL: Lights up during Repeat Play for whole disc. REP A-B: Lights up during A-B Repeat. ST Lights up when receiving a strong FM radio signal in Auto Tuning or Auto Preset mode. AUTO Disc indicator Lights up when using Auto Tuning or Auto Preset in Tuning mode. DVD: Lights up while a DVD disc is set in the disc tray. VCD: Lights up while a VCD disc is set in the disc tray. CD: Lights up while a music CD disc is set in the disc tray. DIGITAL PL DSP MATRIX PCM TITLE TRACK CHAP PROGRESSIVE DVD VCD CD PROG SLEEP VIRTUAL SILENT MULTI2CH REP A-B ALL AUTO ST MEMORY PS TUNED PTY RT CT PTY HOLD 888888888888 Stop (Pause) indicator Lights up when stopping or pausing disc playback. Title, Track, Chapter indicator MEMORY TITLE: Lights up when showing the title. TRACK: Lights up when showing the track. CHAP: Lights up when showing the chapter. Blinks when memorizing (presetting) an FM/ AM radio station. Playback indicator Lights up during disc playback. MULTI, 2CH MULTI: Lights up when playing a multi-channel Super Audio CD. 2CH: Lights up when playing a 2-channel Super Audio CD. RDS indicator (U. K. and Europe models only) Lights up when receiving an RDS signal. In PTY SEEK mode the PTY HOLD indicator lights up. 20 006DVX-S200-en 20 04.3.1, 11:12 AM Advanced Features Remote Control Features CinemaStation AMP Decoder selection SET MENU Amp mode DVD/CD Playback Subtitles, audio language selection FM/AM Radio station reception Radio station preset Tuner mode DVD/CD mode POWER TV /DTS NIGHT AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B “3” button To switch modes, follow the steps below. • Amp mode: Press AMP. • DVD/CD mode: Press DVD/CD. See page 23, “DVD/CD Mode Button Names and Functions”. • Tuner mode: Press TUNER. For details on Tuner operations, see page 39, “Listening to the Radio”. Advanced Features For example, in Amp mode the “3” button is used to select Matrix 6.1, but in DVD/CD mode, it functions as a numerical button that specifies time, track and other numbers. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER As shown on the left, CinemaStation is composed of three main parts. Remote Control button operations change depending on the mode, so it is possible to control all Amplifier, DVD/CD and Tuner functions with a single remote unit. AMP AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 TUNER MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME DVD/CD The Remote Control can also operate a television or VCR connected to CinemaStation. However, it is first necessary to enter the manufacturer code for the equipment in the Remote Control’s memory. See page 84, “Storing Manufacturer Codes in the Remote Control”. CINEMA Using the Remote Control Within 6m (20 feet) 30° 30° Some reminders when using the Remote Control • Do not spill water or tea, or drop anything on the unit. • Do not leave the unit in the following places. Near a stove, bath or hot and humid place. In a dusty place. In an extremely cold place. When the batteries run down, replace them When the batteries grow old, the effective operation distance decreases considerably. When that happens, replace the batteries with two new ones. Once you take the old batteries out, replace them within two minutes to preserve the memory in the Remote Control. Use the Remote Control within 6 m (20 feet) of the CinemaStation and point it toward the Remote Control Sensor. Notes English • Replace worn out batteries as soon as possible. • Do not use a new battery with one that has been used before. • Do not use different types of batteries (for example, alkaline with manganese) together. Each type of battery has its own characteristics. • If a battery starts leaking, dispose of it immediately. Be careful not to let leaking battery acid come into contact with you or your clothing. Before inserting new batteries wipe the compartment clean. 21 006DVX-S200-en 21 04.3.1, 11:12 AM Advanced Features Amp Mode Button Names and Functions Press AMP before starting operations. Advice • The purple color on the Remote Control indicates Amp mode. • Buttons with an asterisk (*) mark work even if you do not press AMP before starting operations. q/DTS, SELECT MATRIX 6.1 Switches between Dolby Digital and DTS decoders. After pressing q/DTS, repeatedly press SELECT to select a decoder. (See page 74.) Sets the Matrix 6.1 decoder. (See page 65.) In most cases, the Matrix 6.1 decoder works automatically once Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES discs start playing. However, for some disc types, you may have to set the decoder using this button. Infrared signal transmitter Sends an infrared signal to the CinemaStation. STEREO Switches between normal stereo sound and audio with a sound field effect. (See page 75.) Select STEREO to listen to audio with no sound field effect from the Front L/R Speakers. POWER (a/I)* DVR-S200 WB56620 Switches the CinemaStation between ON and STANDBY. POWER POWER TV /DTS NIGHT AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT Sets the CinemaStation to Night Listening mode. (See page 71.) SURR SHIFT Volume level buttons Adjust speaker volume level. (See page 61.) SW +/-: Adjusts the Subwoofer volume. CENTER +/-: Adjusts the Center Speaker volume. SURR +/-: Adjusts the volume of the Surround Speakers. TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP h, g, q, w PRESET Adjusts the test tone and SET MENU. PRESET ON SCREEN MUTE* Sets the Sleep Timer. (See page 79.) MENU SET MENU Turns off the sound. Press again to return to the previous sound volume. This button works in every mode. SET MENU CH ENTER RETURN STATUS VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP Puts the Remote Control in Amp mode. Selects a source to operate with the Remote Control. (See pages 26 and 27.) To operate a VCR, CD or MD recorder, you need to set the manufacturer code for the VCR or MD/CD-R button. MD/CD-R MOVIE VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 SPORTS Outputs a test tone. (See page 59.) Adjusts the overall volume level. Press + to increase the volume and - to decrease the volume. GAME DSP Program buttons* CINEMA DVD/CD VCR MD/CD-R TUNER MOVIE VCR MUSIC TEST VOLUME +/-* AMP DVD/CD Input Selection buttons* Enters the SET MENU. (See page 89.) CH TEST Input Selection buttons for U.K. and Europe models are as shown. SLEEP* MUSIC SPORTS VIDEO Selects one of four DSP Programs: MOVIE, MUSIC, SPORTS or GAME. (See pages 16 and 17.) The MOVIE and MUSIC groups contain multiple sound field programs. Press the button repeatedly and select the effect you like. GAME CINEMA U.K. and Europe models 22 006DVX-S200-en 22 04.3.1, 11:12 AM Advanced Features DVD/CD Mode Button Names and Functions Press DVD/CD before starting operations. Advice • The green color on the Remote Control indicates DVD/CD mode. Input numerals for track numbers and others. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV w, f Fast forwards and reverses. /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT Advanced Features Number buttons (1-9, 0) While holding down SHIFT, press one of the following buttons to enable the corresponding operation. 7→REPEAT: Enables Repeat Play. 8→A–B: Enables settings for A-B Repeat. 2→AUDIO: Switches the audio language of the DVD video. 3→ANGLE: Switches the angle of the DVD video. 4→SUBTITLE: Switches the subtitle language of the DVD video. SURR s (Stop) SHIFT b, a (Skip) TV INPUT Moves to the start of a disc track. TV CH Stops disc playback. A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET e (Pause) Pauses disc playback. ON SCREEN MENU ON SCREEN Shows the On Screen Menu on the TV. (See pages 24 and 93.) SET MENU CH CH ENTER STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL RETURN AMP VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS MENU Shows the Disc Menu on the TV. MUTE DVD/CD Puts the Remote Control in DVD/CD mode. Starts disc playback. RETURN STATUS Shows type of disc, play/stop status, playing time and other info. h (Play) GAME Returns the Disc Menu to one position before the current screen. h, g, q, w/ENTER Adjusts On Screen Menu and other settings. CINEMA English 23 006DVX-S200-en 23 04.3.1, 11:12 AM Advanced Features Using the On Screen Menu The On Screen Menu includes Preference, Toolbar and Setup. Perform operations using the TV screen. Preference: You can adjust picture contrast, sharpness and other picture qualities of the DVD or video CD to your liking. Toolbar: You can use Program Play, Disc Navigation and other handy playback features. Setup: You can adjust DVD playback controls such as the default subtitle language and screen size. Press ON SCREEN. The On Screen Menu appears. ON SCREEN MENU ON SCREEN g CH ENTER , g SET MENU CH , h,g Useful functions RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL Setting the Status Display MUTE Adjusting the picture quality such as contrast or brightness AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 Using Program Play MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME Using zoom and angle view CINEMA Selecting audio and subtitle languages, and learning about the disc structure Program Preferences View Toolbar Play Option Setup Search Finding a scene or track to view or listen to Using the Parental Control Fine-tuning TV screen settings On Screen Menu Setting default subtitle and audio languages Setting Playback Control 24 007DVX-S200-en 24 04.3.1, 11:12 AM Advanced Features On Screen Menu Press h or g to navigate the Main Menus, then press w. Press h or g to navigate the Submenus, then press w. Press h, g, q or w to select or set items. Status window Features Picture Program View Toolbar Play Option Search Clear All Tracks Program Play list (Playlist) Advanced Features Preference Video shift Saturation Contrast Color settings (Colour settings) Brightness Sharpness Zoom Angle Chapter Preview Audio Disc Navigation Sub-title (Subtitle) Frame by Frame Fast Time Slow Access Disc Lock Parental level Enter PIN Change PIN TV TV shape TV System Video Output* *U.K. and Europe models only. Language Setup Default Sub-title (Default Subtitle) Country Menu Language Default audio Digital output Features English Audio Menu PBC Refer to On Screen Menu Guide on pages 95 and 96. 25 007DVX-S200-en 25 04.3.1, 11:13 AM Selecting the Media Device Selecting the Equipment CinemaStation provides you with a variety of playback options, including video discs, music CDs and MP3 discs. You can connect a VCR or video game console and increase your home entertainment possibilities. For connecting the equipment you want, follow the chart below. What would you like to play? Play video CDs Equipment you use Video discs CinemaStation Music CDs, MP3 discs or Super Audio CDs CinemaStation FM/AM radio CinemaStation MDs Video tape Video game or video camera CinemaStation + CD or MD recorder CinemaStation + VCR CinemaStation + video game console or video camera 26 007DVX-S200-en 26 04.3.1, 11:13 AM Selecting the Media Device Making the connections Selecting the equipment Press DVD/CD on the Remote Control. Complete the steps on pages 8 and 9, “Connecting the Speakers and TV”. Complete the steps on pages 8 and 9, “Connecting the Speakers and TV”. Then connect a CD or MD recorder to CinemaStation. See page 50, “Connecting Audio Equipment”. Complete the steps on pages 8 and 9, “Connecting the Speakers and TV”. Then connect a VCR to CinemaStation. See page 46, “Connecting Video Equipment”. VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA TUNER Press TUNER on the Remote Control. DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE To tune in your favorite channel, see page 39, “Listening to the Radio”. VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA MD/CD-R Press MD/CD-R on the Remote Control. DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA VCR Press VCR on the Remote Control. DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA VIDEO 1 Press VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 on the Remote Control. VIDEO 2 DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME English Complete the steps on pages 8 and 9, “Connecting the Speakers and TV”. Then connect a game console or video camera to CinemaStation. See page 46, “Connecting Video Equipment”. To play a video disc, perform steps 1 to 10 on pages 10 to 12, “Viewing a DVD”. To play a music disc, perform steps 3 to 10 on pages 10 to 12, “Viewing a DVD”. DVD/CD MD/CD-R Selecting the Media Device Complete the steps on pages 8 and 9, “Connecting the Speakers and TV”. Then connect the indoor FM Antenna and AM Loop Antenna to CinemaStation. See page 38, “Connecting the Antennas”. DVD/CD CINEMA Note • Press VIDEO for U.K. and Europe models. 27 007DVX-S200-en 27 04.3.1, 11:13 AM Playing Video and Music Discs Playback Methods CinemaStation provides you with a variety of playback methods, including the ability to select and quickly find a scene or tune. AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Start operations after first pressing DVD/CD. CinemaStation enters DVD/CD mode to play a disc. GAME In this manual, each type of disc has its own mark as shown below. CINEMA DVD Video Video CD Music CD Super Audio CD DVD-V VCD CD SA-CD Super Audio CD There are different types of Super Audio CDs. — 2-channel discs which contain stereo sound — Multi-channel discs which contain multi-channel sound, up to 6 channels — Hybrid discs which contain both stereo sound and multi-channel sound CinemaStation can play Super Audio CDs with the same operation as music CDs, and can reproduce high quality sound with a completely independent signal circuit for playing Super Audio CDs. (See page 37.) DVD/CD Selecting a Scene or Tune To skip chapters and tracks DVD-V DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Number buttons VCD CD SA-CD To return to the previous chapter or track: Quickly press t twice. When you press t only once, playback starts from the beginning of the currently playing chapter or track. To advance to the next chapter or track: Press y. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH To specify a track A B C D E VCD CD SA-CD SLEEP PRESET PRESET t y ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE Enter the track number with the Number buttons. For a 1-digit number use buttons 1 to 9. For a 2-digit number, use the buttons 1 to 9 for the second digit place, and buttons 1 to 9 and 0 for the first digit place. For example: To select track 17 press the 1 button followed by the 7 button. To select track 20 press the 2 button followed by the 0 button. AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA 28 008DVX-S200-en 28 04.3.1, 11:13 AM Playing Video and Music Discs To Fast Forward and Fast Reverse DVD-V POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT SURR SHIFT A B C D E SLEEP e PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN CH ENTER • D32✕ and 32✕ are not available for CD playback. To pause playback DVD-V w VCD CD SA-CD Playing Video and Music Discs CH d r MENU SET MENU SA-CD Note TV INPUT TV CH CD Perform while playing. To Fast Reverse: Press e. Each time you press the button, the speed changes (D4✕, D8✕ or D32✕). To Fast Forward: Press r. Each time you press the button, the speed changes (4✕, 8✕ or 32✕). DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER VCD Press d while playing. Press w to return to normal playback. RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE DVD-V VCD Press d to pause playback. VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC Frame Advance SPORTS GAME Press d. CINEMA To return to normal play Press w. Slow Advance/Reverse DVD-V VCD Press d to pause playback. To return press e or to advance press r. To Slow Reverse, press e. Each time you press the button, the speed changes (- 1/8, -1/4 or –1/2). To Slow Advance, press r. Each time you press the button, the speed changes (1/8, 1/4 or 1/2). To return to normal play Press w. Advice Notes English • You can also use the On Screen Menu to operate Frame Advance, Fast Forward/Reverse and Slow Advance/Reverse. In addition to those, you can use Frame Reverse from the On Screen Menu. See page 93, “Using the On Screen Menu”. • The Skip feature may not work properly when using Playback Control on page 36 to play a video CD. • If you use Fast Forward/Reverse while playing a Dolby Digital or DTS disc, the Speakers do not output any sound. • Slow Reverse is not available for a video CD. 29 008DVX-S200-en 29 04.3.1, 11:14 AM Playing Video and Music Discs Specify an elapsed time for playback (Time Search) Perform operations using the TV On Screen Menu. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER Press ON SCREEN. Make sure that “Toolbar” is selected. TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Number buttons Program Preferences View Toolbar Play Option Setup Search SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET ON SCREEN PRESET ON SCREEN MENU h Press w to select “Play Option”. g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE ENTER g Press g to select “Search”. View Frame by Frame Play Option Fast Search Time AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R VCR TUNER VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 Slow MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA Press w to select “Time”. Frame by Frame Fast Time 0:00:28 Slow Press w or q to select 0:00:00 (hour, minute or second) with the cursor. Then enter time with the Number buttons. You can specify the time only within the current track or title, not the whole disc. Frame by Frame Cursor Fast Time 0:02:09 Slow Press ENTER, then press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen Menu. When pressing ENTER, playback starts from the time position you specified in step 5. 30 008DVX-S200-en 30 04.3.1, 11:14 AM Playing Video and Music Discs Customizing Playback Order (Program Play) DVD-V VCD CD SA-CD Playback your favorite chapters and tracks in the order you want. Perform operations using the TV On Screen Menu. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER Press ON SCREEN. Make sure that “Toolbar” is selected. TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Program SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH View Toolbar Play Option Setup Search A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU h g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU Press w, then repeatedly press h to select “Program”. RETURN STATUS TEST ENTER Clear all VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g AMP Tracks Program Program DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 View Play list MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 Play Option MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Playing Video and Music Discs ON SCREEN Preferences GAME CINEMA Press w, then press h to select “Tracks”. Then press w. E.g. DVD video Clear all Tracks T1 C1 Program Play list E.g. CD Clear all Tracks T1 Program Play list English 31 008DVX-S200-en 31 04.3.1, 11:14 AM Playing Video and Music Discs Select the chapter or track to add to Program Play. E.g. DVD video Press h or g to select the title number to add, then press ENTER. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Title 9 Title 10 Title 1 SHIFT Chapter 1 TV INPUT TV CH Title 2 A B C D E SLEEP PRESET ON SCREEN MENU ➡ ON SCREEN Title 3 PRESET h g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU RETURN STATUS TEST Press h or g to select the chapter number to add, then press ENTER. ENTER VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g Title 9 Title 10 AMP Title 1 DVD/CD VCR Chapter 1 VIDEO 1 Title 2 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 Title 3 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS CINEMA GAME E.g. CD Press h or g to select the track number to add, then press ENTER. Track 14 Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Perform step 4 until you add all desired chapters or tracks. Press q to return to the screen in step 3, and press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen Menu. Program Play starts. Press w to start Program Play when Program Play does not start. Advice • Once Program Play is set, the PROG indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. Note • Playback Control is not available during Program Play of a video CD. 32 008DVX-S200-en 32 04.3.1, 11:14 AM Playing Video and Music Discs Check Program Play content ON SCREEN ON SCREEN MENU h Perform steps 1 to 2 in “Customizing Playback Order (Program Play)” on page 31. g CH ENTER g SET MENU CH RETURN STATUS TEST Press w, then press g to select “Play list” (“Playlist”). Then press w. The list appears in the specified order. g Press h or g to scroll through the list. Turn on/off Program Play ON SCREEN MENU h g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU RETURN STATUS TEST Perform steps 1 to 2 in “Customizing Playback Order (Program Play)” on page 31. g Playing Video and Music Discs ON SCREEN CinemaStation automatically sets Program menu item to “On” after Program Play starts. The setting does not change even if Program Play finishes, so you can restart Program Play by pressing w. To return to normal playback, select “Off” for Program menu item in the On Screen Menu. Even if you set it to “Off”, the playlist remains in the memory, so you can use the previous play list by setting it to “On”. Press w to select “Program”. Then press w. Press h or g to select “On” or “Off”. Delete Program Play ON SCREEN ON SCREEN MENU h g CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS Perform steps 1 to 2 in “Customizing Playback Order (Program Play)” on page 31. g SET MENU TEST g Press w, then press h to select “Clear All”. Then press w. “Clear” changes to “Cleared”, and all Program Play content is deleted. English 33 008DVX-S200-en 33 04.3.1, 11:14 AM Playing Video and Music Discs Repeating a Disc or Track (Repeat Play) VCD CD SA-CD You can repeat a favorite track, chapter or entire disc. You can also repeat certain parts you specified as many times as you like. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS DVD-V AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT REPEAT Play back a disc. To repeat a chapter or track first start playing it. See page 28, “Selecting a Scene or Tune”. SHIFT SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU While holding down SHIFT, press REPEAT to select Repeat mode. Every time you press the button, the display on the TV screen changes as shown below. DVD video SET MENU CH CH ENTER Off (Normal playback) RETURN STATUS TEST Repeat (Repeat Play for currently playing chapter) VOLUME TV VOL MUTE Title (Repeat Play for currently playing title) AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS CINEMA GAME Disc (Repeat Play for currently playing disc) Video CD/CD Off (Normal playback) Repeat (Repeat Play for currently playing track) Disc (Repeat Play for currently playing disc) SA-CD Off (Normal playback) Repeat (Repeat Play for currently playing track) Area (Repeat Play for currently playing Area) Advice • Once Repeat Play is selected, the Repeat mode indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. — REP indicates title, chapter and track repeat — REP ALL indicates entire disc repeat Notes • Repeat Play may not work properly with some DVD video discs. • Repeat Play will not work during Menu Play of a video CD that is using Playback Control. 34 009DVX-S200-en 34 04.3.1, 11:14 AM Playing Video and Music Discs Repeat between two points (A-B Repeat) DVD-V VCD CD SA-CD Specify the start and end of a favorite segment (points A and B) then playback between those two points as much as you like. You can specify a part within one title or track. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Play back a disc. A-B SHIFT SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E While holding down SHIFT at the start position (point A), press A-B. Repeat A” appears on the TV screen. “ SLEEP PRESET PRESET MENU • The REP A- indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE While holding down SHIFT at the end position (point B), press A-B. A/B” appears on the TV screen. A-B Repeat starts. “ AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Advice • The REP A-B indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. GAME Playing Video and Music Discs Advice ON SCREEN To return to normal playback CINEMA While holding down SHIFT, press A-B. “ A/B Off” appears on the TV screen, and A-B Repeat cancels. English Notes • A-B Repeat may not work properly with some DVD video discs. • You can use A-B Repeat only within one track or title. 35 009DVX-S200-en 35 04.3.1, 11:15 AM Playing Video and Music Discs Using Using aa Disc Disc Menu Menu Many DVDs or video CDs that have Playback Control include an original menu. You can use the menu for skipping to a favorite title or chapter and switching audio or subtitle language. Navigate a DVD Disc Menu h ON SCREEN MENU MENU Press MENU. A menu appears on the TV screen. g CH ENTER g SET MENU CH RETURN STATUS ENTER TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g Advice • Depending on the disc, a menu may automatically pop up when playback starts. AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Select items with h, g, q, w and press ENTER. If operating instructions appear in the menu, follow them and repeat step 2. GAME CINEMA Use Video CD Playback Control (PBC) (Menu Play) DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Number buttons SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET If you play a video CD that includes Playback Control, a menu will appear on the TV screen. From the menu you can select the scenes and information that interest you. In this manual, using the menu screen to play media is called Video CD Menu Play. Number buttons: For selecting the desired item. RETURN: For returning to the previous screen. y: For moving to the next screen. t: For returning to the previous screen. PRESET t y ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST RETURN VOLUME O Note • Playback Control is not available during Program Play. 36 009DVX-S200-en 36 04.3.1, 11:15 AM Playing Video and Music Discs MP3 Playback Features You can play MP3 music that was recorded onto a CD-R or CD-RW by a computer. If you use the CinemaStation to playback MP3 discs recorded on a computer, each folder on the disc is designated an “Album”, and each file in each folder a “Track”. Advice Root : Album (Folder) : Track (File) • CinemaStation is compatible with a bit rate range of 32, 64, 96, 128, 192 or 256 kbps. CinemaStation is also compatible with variable bit rate encoded MP3 files. • CinemaStation is compatible with a sampling frequency of 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz. Program Play You can playback your favorite tracks in the order you want. See page 31, “Customizing Playback Order (Program Play)”. Playback status on the TV screen You can check the playback status (e.g. disc type) along with the total and elapsed playing time of the current track on the TV screen. Playing Video and Music Discs Repeat Play You can use Track Repeat and Album Repeat to repeat your favorite track and disc. See page 34, “Repeating a Disc or Track (Repeat Play)”. Notes • Depending on the way you assign folder or file names when you record the MP3 disc, the CinemaStation may play tracks in a different order from the order they were recorded in. • Depending on recording conditions, some discs cannot be played back. Playing a Super Audio CD Using the TV screen, selected area and tracks of the Super Audio CD can be played back. Turn on the TV and switch the input source to this unit. Insert the disc. (The track display screen of the Multi-channel appears.) Select Multi-channel, Stereo or CD-DA area using h and g and press w. E.g. When the disc contains Multi-channel, Stereo and CD-DA areas. Multi-channel Stereo Press j to display the area selection screen. CD-DA • Area can be selected only when the Super Audio CD is stopped. • When “Multi-channel” or “Stereo” is selected, output is only from the speakers. (Only the sound from the front channel is output from the headphones.) Select a track using h and g, and press ENTER to start playback. 009DVX-S200-en 37 04.3.1, 11:15 AM English Notes 37 Listening to the Radio Connecting the Antennas CinemaStation includes an AM Loop Antenna and indoor FM Antenna. Use the supplied antennas in areas with good radio wave reception. Connect each antenna into its jack properly. Connecting the FM Antenna Indoor FM Antenna (supplied) Connect the supplied indoor FM Antenna to the FM ANT jack. AM Loop Antenna (supplied) When connecting an outdoor FM antenna COMPONENT VIDEO (480p/480i) Use the antenna’s coaxial cable and a commercially available F-type connector to connect the antenna to the FM ANT jack. For details, ask the shop where you bought the outdoor antenna. (DVD ONLY) Y PB PR AM ANT MONITOR OUT GND IN OUT FM ANT 75 UNBAL OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO SUBWOOFER OUT SYSTEM CONNECTOR Earth (GND jack) The GND jack does not provide secure grounding. However when there is a lot of noise, connecting it may improve reception. To ground CinemaStation, connect one end of a vinyl coated wire to the GND jack and the other end to a commercially available grounding rod or copper sheet, and bury the rod or sheet in damp earth. Connecting the AM Loop Antenna Attach the Antenna to its stand. Open the AM ANT and GND jack levers to the right. Insert the AM Loop Antenna’s cord cores into the AM ANT and GND jacks. Close the lever to fasten the cord. Pull the cord lightly to make sure it is properly fastened. Adjust the Antenna left and right and find the best position for reception. AM ANT jack Cord Core White Lever Black GND jack Advice • The AM Loop Antenna can be detached from its stand and attached to a wall. • To improve reception, we recommend that you install an outdoor antenna. For details, contact your local Yamaha sound products service center. Notes • Install the supplied indoor FM Antenna and AM Loop Antenna away from this system. • Even if you connect an outdoor AM antenna, be sure to still use the AM Loop Antenna. 38 010DVX-S200-en 38 04.3.1, 11:16 AM Listening to the Radio Listening to the Radio CinemaStation provides several methods for tuning radio stations to help you find channels as easy as you can. Selecting the Radio Tuner INPUT Press INPUT repeatedly on CinemaStation until TUNER appears. The input source changes to Tuner (Radio) and you can listen to AM/FM broadcasts. Advice • You can also press TUNER on the Remote Control to change the input source to Tuner. Selecting Radio Stations You have two ways to select radio stations, Auto Tuning and Manual Tuning. Auto Tuning is quick and handy to use when radio signal reception is strong. Listening to the Radio Display Select stations automatically (Auto Tuning) d PRESET/TUNING PRESET/BAND Press PRESET/BAND to select either FM or AM. Each time you press, the mode changes in the order as follows: FM (Tuning mode) → AM (Tuning mode) → (Preset mode) → FM (Tuning mode) → ... Advice • If the colon (:) beside the Band indicator goes out, that means CinemaStation is in Tuning mode. Make sure the colon (:) is not lit up. AUTO/MAN’L Display PRESET/TUNING u Preset number Press PRESET/TUNING u/d to select the radio station you want to receive. Press u to search for high-frequency stations or press d to search for low-frequency stations. Band English Preset Colon* group Press AUTO/MAN’L to set CinemaStation to Auto Tuning mode. When CinemaStation is set to Auto Tuning mode, the AUTO indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. Frequency * Goes out in Tuning mode, lights up in Preset mode. 39 010DVX-S200-en 39 04.3.1, 11:16 AM Listening to the Radio Select your favorite stations by hand (Manual Tuning) d PRESET/TUNING PRESET/BAND For stations with weak radio signals, tune manually. Perform step 1 in “Select stations automatically (Auto Tuning)” on page 39. Press AUTO/MAN’L to set CinemaStation to Manual Tuning mode. When CinemaStation is set to Manual Tuning mode, the AUTO indicator goes out from the CinemaStation Display. Display AUTO/MAN’L PRESET/TUNING u Press PRESET/TUNING u/d to select the radio station you want to receive. Hold down the button to continue the tuning search. Advice • If the radio waves are weak and Auto Tuning doesn’t work, tune manually (Manual Tuning). • When Auto Tuning finds a radio station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency appears. • Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. 40 010DVX-S200-en 40 04.3.1, 11:16 AM Listening to the Radio Setting Channels in Advance (Preset) Presetting radio stations in memory helps you tune the preset radio stations using a few simple button operations. Automatically preset FM stations in advance (Auto Preset) A/B/C/D/E PRESET/BAND MEMORY Up to 40 stations (5 Groups ✕ 8 Stations) can be automatically preset. Press PRESET/BAND to select FM. Press AUTO/MAN’L to make the AUTO indicator light up. AUTO/MAN’L PRESET/TUNING u Listening to the Radio Display Keep pressing MEMORY down for about 3 seconds. The Preset Number, MEMORY and AUTO indicators blink. After a few seconds, Auto Preset starts at the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequency. When Auto Preset finishes the frequency of the last radio station memorized appears. d PRESET/TUNING Customizing Auto Preset method You can specify the Preset Group or number to start tuning. You can also start Auto Tuning at the frequency currently displayed toward either the lower or higher frequency. Perform steps 1 and 2 above, in “Automatically preset FM stations in advance (Auto Preset)”. Press MEMORY for about 3 seconds, then press A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u/d to select the Preset Number you want to memorize first. Auto Preset will stop when the number memorized reaches 40 radio stations. Press PRESET/BAND to turn off the colon (:), then press PRESET/TUNING u/d. When pressing d, Auto Preset starts at the frequency currently displayed toward the lower frequency, and when pressing u, Auto Preset starts at the frequency currently displayed toward the higher frequency. English 41 010DVX-S200-en 41 04.3.1, 11:16 AM Listening to the Radio Manually preset stations in advance (Manual Preset) You can manually preset up to 40 radio stations. MEMORY A/B/C/D/E Select radio stations you want to preset. See page 39, “Selecting Radio Stations”. The frequency and broadcast band (FM or AM) of the tuned-in station appear in the CinemaStation Display. Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator blinks for about 5 seconds in the CinemaStation Display, which means CinemaStation is ready to preset. Display PRESET/TUNING u d PRESET/TUNING While the MEMORY indicator is blinking, press A/B/C/D/E to select the Preset Group (A to E). The Group appears. Check that the colon (:) beside the band indicator lights up. While the MEMORY indicator is blinking, press PRESET/TUNING u/d to select a Preset Number (1 to 8). Press u for a larger number and d for a smaller number. While the MEMORY indicator is blinking, press MEMORY. The selected Preset Group and Number, broadcast band (FM or AM) and frequency appear in the CinemaStation Display. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to manually preset other radio stations. Advice • When presetting a radio station, you can set the frequency and reception mode (stereo/monaural) at the same time. • You can change the order of preset FM radio stations later. See page 43, “Changing the Order of Preset Stations”. • If the number of radio stations that have been preset is less than 40, Auto Preset automatically stops after searching the whole frequency range. Notes • If a new radio station is preset for a Preset Number, the previously preset station for the Preset Number is deleted. • In Auto Preset, only FM radio stations with a strong signal are set. To preset radio stations with a weak signal set reception mode to monaural and preset manually. 42 010DVX-S200-en 42 04.3.1, 11:16 AM Listening to the Radio Selecting a Preset Station (Preset Tuning) You can tune in a radio station simply by selecting its Preset Number. Start operations after first pressing TUNER. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select the station’s Preset Group. The Preset Group that appears in the CinemaStation Display changes each time you press A/B/C/D/E. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET A/B/C/D/E PRESET PRESET d u PRESET ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH Press PRESET u/d to select the Preset Number. The Preset Group and Number, broadcast band (FM or AM) and frequency appear in the CinemaStation Display with the TUNED indicator lit up. CH ENTER TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE Advice • You can also perform Preset Tuning by repeatedly pressing A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u/d on CinemaStation. AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 TUNER MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME Listening to the Radio RETURN STATUS Changing the Order of Preset Stations You can also change the order of preset stations. PRESET/BAND Below is an example of the steps for switching the E1 and A5 radio stations. Tune in the radio station preset to E1. Review the procedure above, “Selecting a Preset Station (Preset Tuning)”. Press PRESET/BAND for about 3 seconds. E1 and the MEMORY indicator will blink in the CinemaStation Display. PRESET/TUNING u d PRESET/TUNING Tune in the radio station preset to A5 using A/B/ C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING u/d. A5 and the MEMORY indicator will blink in the CinemaStation Display. English Press PRESET/BAND. “EDIT E1-A5” will appear in the CinemaStation Display and the preset stations will exchange places. 43 010DVX-S200-en 43 04.3.1, 11:16 AM Listening to the Radio Receiving RDS Stations (U.K. and Europe models only) DVR-S200RDS WB56630 POWER RDS (Radio Data System) is a transmission system for FM stations used in many countries. POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT RDS transmissions contain various types of information, including PS (Program Service), PTY (Program Type), RT (Radio Text), and CT (Clock Time). RDS works through cooperation among broadcasting stations. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET PRESET d u PRESET FREQ/RDS MODE PTY SEEK START FREQ/RDS ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER PTY SEEK START PTY SEEK MODE RETURN STATUS FREQ/RDS Press this button when receiving an RDS station to switch between frequency and RDS mode. The RDS mode display may include PS, PTY, RT and CT, depending on the information a radio station provides. PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the program type to search for. TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE U.K. and Europe models PTY SEEK START Once the program type has been selected in PTY SEEK mode, press this button to begin the search. RDS Modes PTY (Program Type) RDS supports four types of information: PS, PTY, RT and CT. NEWS News AFFAIRS Current Affairs INFO General Information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education PTY (Program Type) Divides RDS broadcasts into the 15 genres shown at right. DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science RT (Radio Text) Shows RDS broadcast information (including song title, artist name) using up to 64 letters and numbers plus the umlaut letter. If the radio text contains other characters, they will appear with an underbar. VARIED Light Entertainment POP M Pops ROCK M Rock M.O.R. M Middle-Of-the-Road Music (easy-listening) LIGHT M Light Classics CLASSICS Serious Classics OTHER M Other Music PS (Program Service) Shows the name of the RDS station broadcasting. CT (Clock Time) Shows the current time updated once a minute. If data flow is interrupted, CT WAIT will appear. 44 011DVX-S200-en 44 04.3.1, 11:17 AM Listening to the Radio Change RDS Mode There are four RDS display modes. When an RDS station is broadcasting, PS, PTY, RT or CT mode indicators corresponding to the services provided light up in the CinemaStation Display. Press FREQ/RDS repeatedly to change among the modes supported by the currently tuned RDS station. PS PTY RT CT Notes RDS mode OFF About PTY SEEK When you select the program type, CinemaStation automatically searches through all preset stations currently broadcasting for that type. Listening to the Radio • When an RDS station is broadcasting, do not press FREQ/RDS until one or more mode indicators light up in the CinemaStation Display. If you press FREQ/RDS before the mode indicators light up, CinemaStation may not be able to change modes. • RDS information not provided by a station cannot be selected. • If the RDS station’s signal transmission is too weak, CinemaStation may not be able to use the service fully. In particular, radio text uses a lot of bandwidth, so it may not be available even when other modes are selectable. • RDS information may not transmit under poor conditions. In this case, press AUTO/MAN’L to set CinemaStation to Manual Tuning mode. This changes reception to monaural and may help RDS information reappear when you switch to RDS display mode. • If outside interference disrupts an RDS station broadcast, RDS information may suddenly disappear and “...WAIT ” appears in the CinemaStation Display. Press PTY SEEK MODE to set CinemaStation to PTY SEEK mode. The program type of the tuned in station or NEWS blinks in the CinemaStation Display. Press PRESET u/d to select the program type you want. Your program type selection appears in the CinemaStation Display. Press PTY SEEK START to start searching all preset RDS stations. The selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up while the search is in progress. If the search finds a station that matches the program type you selected, CinemaStation will tune it in. If the station tuned in is not the one you want press PTY SEEK START again to continue the search for other stations broadcasting the program type you selected. English To cancel steps 1 or 2 Press PTY SEEK MODE twice. 45 011DVX-S200-en 45 04.3.1, 11:17 AM Using Other Equipment Connecting Video Equipment Connect a VCR to CinemaStation to play or dub videos. You can also connect a game console or video camera. Connecting a Game Console or VCR Please... • Always read the owner’s manual of any equipment you want to connect. Connection Cables Use a commercially available Audio/Video cable. Use the supplied Video Pin Cable. Use a commercially available optical cable Audio/Video cable (commercially available) TV Video Pin Cable (supplied) Optical cable (commercially available) VCR INPUT When directly connecting the TV with the VCR, you can play video tape on the VCR even if you turn off CinemaStation. OUTPUT1 OUTPUT2 VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO AUDIO INPUT1 INPUT2 VIDEO L L L L AUDIO R R R S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) R COMPONENT VIDEO (480p/480i) (DVD ONLY) Y PB PR AM ANT MONITOR OUT VIDEO GND IN L OUT FM ANT R 75 UNBAL IN IN VIDEO 1 Game console or video camera OUT VCR IN VIDEO 2 IN OUT SUBWOOFER OUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTOR CinemaStation VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OUTPUT Or DIGITAL OPTICAL OUTPUT The cable can be connected to either a VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 jack. (Only VIDEO jacks are available on U.K. and Europe models.) 46 011DVX-S200-en 46 04.3.1, 11:17 AM Using Other Equipment Notes on the audio jacks • You cannot simultaneously use both IN and OUT jacks when the jack names are the same as each other. For example, the signal input from the VCR IN jack does not output from the VCR OUT jack. • CinemaStation’s digital and analog signal circuits are independent of each other, so analog input signals can only output from analog output jacks and digital input signals can only output from digital output jacks. Notes on recording and playing video Connect a game console to a digital input Using Other Equipment • Perform a test recording before recording. • Do not press ON SCREEN during recording a DVD video. If you press ON SCREEN, the On Screen Menu appears, and both the video and On Screen Menu will be recorded. • It is not possible to record DSP effects. • When you turn off the connected VCR power, playback sound may become distorted and the volume reduced. In this case, turn on the VCR power. • Even if you adjust the audio volume, audio quality, or change the DSP Program during a video recording, it has no effect on the recorded sound. • Video recordings that you make cannot be used for any purpose other than private enjoyment without the consent of the copyright holder. • You cannot record from a copy protected DVD disc. If your game console has a digital output jack (optical), it can be connected to CinemaStation’s OPTICAL IN jack. See page 50, “Connecting Audio Equipment” to learn how to connect an optical jack. Connect the video output to CinemaStation’s VIDEO 1 IN or VIDEO 2 IN jack. (“VIDEO” IN jack on U.K. and Europe models) Connect a TV to an audio input Enjoy TV sound with CinemaStation by connecting the TV audio output jack to the audio IN jacks of VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 (“VIDEO” IN jack on U.K. and Europe models). Press VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 on the Remote Control to input TV sound. TV OUTPUT VIDEO Note L • Press VIDEO for U.K. and Europe models. AUDIO R Use a commercially available audio cable. English VIDEO CinemaStation L R IN VIDEO 1 IN OUT VCR IN VIDEO 2 47 011DVX-S200-en 47 04.3.1, 11:17 AM Using Other Equipment Operating a VCR For VCR operations, read your VCR owner’s manual. Advice DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER • The Remote Control can also operate a television or VCR connected to CinemaStation. However, it is first necessary to enter the manufacturer code for the equipment in the Remote Control’s memory. See page 84, “Storing Manufacturer Codes in the Remote Control”. POWER POWER TV /DTS NIGHT AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR SHIFT Turn on the TV. AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 VCR MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Turn on the VCR. GAME Switch the TV input. For example, switch to video 1 if CinemaStation is connected to video input 1 on the television. CINEMA Press POWER to turn on CinemaStation. Press VCR. CinemaStation can now output the VCR signal. Operate your VCR. Playing a Video Game or Operating a Video Camera For game console and video camera operations, read their respective owner’s manuals. Turn on the TV. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER POWER Turn on a game console or video camera. TV /DTS NIGHT AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR Switch the TV input. For example, switch to video 1 if CinemaStation is connected to video input 1 on the television. SHIFT AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 VIDEO 1 Press POWER to turn on CinemaStation. VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS CINEMA GAME Press VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 according to the jacks connected to the game console or video camera. CinemaStation can now output video signals (game console or video camera). Note • Press VIDEO for U.K. and Europe models. Play your game console or video camera. 48 011DVX-S200-en 48 04.3.1, 11:17 AM Using Other Equipment Dubbing from a Video Camera to a VCR For video camera and VCR operations, be sure to read their respective owner’s manuals. Turn on the TV. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER POWER TV /DTS NIGHT AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER Turn on the video camera and VCR. SURR SHIFT AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 VIDEO 1 VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME Switch the TV input. For example, switch to video 1 if CinemaStation is connected to video input 1 on the television. Press POWER to turn on CinemaStation. Note • Press VIDEO for U.K. and Europe models. Prepare to record with the VCR. For example, switch the VCR input to external. Start playback on the video camera, then start recording with the VCR. Using Other Equipment Press VIDEO 1 or VIDEO 2 according to the jacks connected to the video camera. CinemaStation can now input video signal (video camera). CINEMA Connecting with SCART cable (U.K. and Europe models only) Do not connect CinemaStation to a monitor via a VCR. The copyright protection technology incorporated in CinemaStation may not allow the video to play. TV CinemaStation VCR • If you play a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. English Note 49 011DVX-S200-en 49 04.3.1, 11:17 AM Using Other Equipment Connecting Audio Equipment You can connect a CD recorder or MD recorder to CinemaStation to record audio played on CinemaStation. Connecting a CD or MD Recorder Please... • For equipment connection, read the owner's manual of the equipment you want to connect. Connection Cables Use a commercially available Audio Pin Cable. Use a commercially available Optical Cable Audio Pin Cable (commercially available) Optical Cable (commercially available) CD recorder or MD recorder OUTPUT INPUT OPTICAL OUTPUT L INPUT R You can connect a CD or MD recorder to MD/CD-R jacks, OPTICAL jacks or both. S VIDEO (DVD ONLY) COMPONENT VIDEO (480p/480i) (DVD ONLY) Y PB PR AM ANT MONITOR OUT GND IN OUT FM ANT 75 UNBAL IN VIDEO 2 IN OUT MD/CD-R SUBWOOFER OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTOR Anti-dust cap When connecting an optical cable, first remove the dust cap attached to the OPTICAL jack. Store the cap in a safe place and re-attach it when the jack is not in use to prevent the jack from collecting dust. CinemaStation Anti-Dust Cap 50 011DVX-S200-en 50 04.3.1, 11:17 AM Using Other Equipment Notes on the digital audio jacks AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 VIDEO 1 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME MD/CD-R CINEMA • The digital jacks are compatible with PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals. • The OPTICAL IN jack is compatible with a digital signal that has a 96 kHz or less sampling frequency. • Press MD/CD-R to operate your CD or MD recorder. When connecting the CD or MD recorder to both MD/CD-R jacks and OPTICAL jacks and “* Input Mode” is set to “AUTO”, the OPTICAL jacks have priority over the MD/CD-R jacks. See page 78, “Switching Input Modes”. • Use “* Input Assign” in the SET MENU to assign the OPTICAL IN jack to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2 (“VIDEO” on U.K. and Europe models), VCR or MD/CD-R. The default setting is MD/CD-R. For example, when connecting your game console to the OPTICAL IN jack, assign the OPTICAL IN jack to VIDEO 1, and press VIDEO 1 to start operating the game console. Set to MD/CD-R (default setting) CinemaStation cannot output a signal to the OPTICAL OUT jack even when inputting a signal from the OPTICAL IN jack. Set to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2 or VCR CinemaStation outputs a signal to the OPTICAL OUT jack when inputting a signal from the OPTICAL IN jack. Notes Using Other Equipment Notes for setting the OPTICAL IN jack and the OPTICAL output signal • U.K. and Europe models only have VIDEO instead of VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2. • VIDEO is used as VIDEO 1 in above models. For details about assigning OPTICAL IN jacks see page 89, “Using the SET MENU”. • CinemaStation cannot output a signal to the MD/CD-R OUT jacks even when receiving a signal from the MD/CD-R IN jacks. • CinemaStation’s digital and analog signal circuits are independent of each other, so analog input signals can only output from analog output jacks and digital input signals can only output from digital output jacks. • CinemaStation’s optical digital jack is designed based on EIA standards. If you use an optical cable that does not meet EIA standards, it may not function properly. English 51 011DVX-S200-en 51 04.3.1, 11:17 AM Using Other Equipment Notes on recording and playing audio • Perform a test recording before recording. • It is not possible to record DSP effects. • CinemaStation cannot output a Super Audio CD signal to the OPTICAL OUT jack. To record a Super Audio CD signal, connect external devices (such as CD or MD recorder) to the analog output jacks and use it to record the signal. • When you turn off the connected CD recorder or MD recorder power, playback sound may become distorted and the volume reduced. In this case, turn on the CD recorder or MD recorder power. • Even if you adjust the audio volume, audio quality, or change the DSP Program during a video recording, it has no effect on the recorded sound. However, in DVD/CD mode, the output sound for recording may cut off if any of the operations below are performed. Do not perform any of the below during recording. — Output a test tone. — Change a DSP Program — Connect/disconnect the headphones • CinemaStation can output a signal from the DIGITAL IN jack to the DIGITAL OUT jack. The signal input from the DIGITAL IN jack cannot output from the analog output jacks, and the signal input from the analog input jacks cannot output from the DIGITAL OUT jacks. • Do not use audio recordings that you make for any purpose other than private enjoyment without the consent of the copyright holder. Timer Playback/Recording Combined with a commercially available audio timer, you can perform Timer Playback and Timer Recordings. Operations vary depending on the equipment and audio timer used, so be sure to read the relevant equipment owner’s manual. 52 011DVX-S200-en 52 04.3.1, 11:17 AM Using Other Equipment Playing a CD or MD Read the owner’s manual of the equipment you want to operate before using it. AMP MD/CD-R DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Advice • The Remote Control can operate a CD or MD recorder connected to CinemaStation. However, it is first necessary to enter the manufacturer code for the equipment in the Remote Control’s memory. See page 84, “Storing Manufacturer Codes in the Remote Control”. GAME CINEMA Turn on the CD recorder or MD recorder. Press POWER to turn on CinemaStation. Start playback on the CD or MD recorder. Recording Audio from CinemaStation Turn on the CD recorder or MD recorder power and get ready for recording. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER POWER TV /DTS NIGHT AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER Press POWER to turn on CinemaStation. SURR SHIFT AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Using Other Equipment Press MD/CD-R. CinemaStation can now output audio signals received from a CD or MD recorder. GAME Input Selection buttons Switch CinemaStation input to the source you want and start playback. E.g. To play a CD: First press DVD/CD then play the CD. Start recording with the CD recorder or MD recorder. CINEMA Advice Notes English • When using Timer Playback/Recording, even if CinemaStation is in standby mode, the memory content (e.g. input source, AM/ FM frequency) is retained and used. • Even if you use DTS software to digitally record a DTS signal only noise will be recorded. • CinemaStation cannot output a Super Audio CD signal to the digital jack. • If you want to perform Timer Recording without hearing sound, turn the volume down before starting Timer Recording. 53 011DVX-S200-en 53 04.3.1, 11:17 AM Creating the Best Listening Space Placing the Speakers (NX-P200) To get the most out of the sound field effects you need to place the speakers in the best positions. To guard against poor acoustics like sound blur make sure the speakers are stable. Also read page 7, “Preparing the Speakers”. Placing the Center Speaker Make sure the top of the television is level. If the top of the television is not level, place the Center Speaker inside the TV rack or directly on the floor. In any case, make sure it is placed on a level surface. When placing on top of the television, use the supplied fastener (two pieces) as shown in the picture on the left, between the bottom of the Center Speaker and top of the television to fasten. Fastener Notes • Do not place on a television with top narrower than the bottom of the speaker. You may get injured if the speaker falls over. • Do not place if the top of the television is slanting. You may get injured if the speaker falls over. • After peeling off the fastener seal, do not touch the bonding surface. If you do, the bonding surface weakens, which later may cause the speaker to fall over. • Before attaching the fastener to the television, wipe the TV top clean. If the surface is dirty or wet tape will lose bonding strength, which later may cause the speaker to fall over. Peel off the seal Placing the Subwoofer Place the Subwoofer on a level hard floor. Use non-skid pads on the bottom of the Subwoofer in the four corners as shown in the picture. This will prevent the Subwoofer from sliding when it vibrates and increase stability, preventing degradation of sound. 54 012DVX-S200-en 54 04.3.1, 11:18 AM Creating the Best Listening Space Placing the Front and Surround Speakers You can place the Front Speakers and Surround Speakers on the floor or a rack, or attach them to a wall. You can also mount them on commercially available speaker stands. When placing on the floor or a rack As shown in the picture, attach the non-skid pads on the bottoms of the Front and Surround Speakers in the four corners. This stabilizes the speakers to prevent sliding. * Place on a stable, flat surface. Non-skid pad Screws (3.5 to 4 mm dia., commercially available) Attach to the wall using the two holes on the back of the Front and Surround Speakers. Attach 2 screws (3.5 to 4 mm dia., commercially available) to each place you want to hang a Front or Surround Speaker. 110 mm 110 mm Hang the speakers on the screws using the holes in the back of each speaker. Creating the Best Listening Space When attaching to a wall Note • Make sure that the tapping screw enters the narrow part of the hole and the speaker is fixed securely in place. 10 mm 20 mm or more Notes English • One speaker weighs about 1.0 kg (2.2 lb). Make sure you fasten screws only into a solid wall or pillar. Do not attach to a wall that is made of plaster, decorative veneer sheeting or other material that peels easily. If the screws come off and a speaker falls, somebody may get injured. • Do not attach the speakers using nails or two-sided tape. Vibration during use may cause the nails to loosen, tape to peel off and speakers to fall, resulting in injury. • CinemaStation may fall over if your feet or hands get caught in the speaker cable. Make sure the cables are fixed in place. • After attaching everything, check the overall safety of your installation. YAMAHA will bear no responsibility for accidents caused by improperly placed equipment or faulty installation methods. 55 012DVX-S200-en 55 04.3.1, 11:18 AM Creating the Best Listening Space When attaching to a speaker stand and bracket Mounting bracket (supplied) Use the supplied screw to attach the mounting bracket to the bottom of the speaker. The jutting part of the bracket enters the groove at the speaker base. Screw (supplied) Use the bracket holes (60 mm spacing) to fasten the mounting bracket to the speaker stand. Use the screws (4 mm dia.), spring washers and washers. Advice 60 mm • When attaching to a speaker stand and bracket, be sure to read their respective owner’s manuals. • When attaching to the optional SPS-200 Speaker Stands, you do not need to attach the supplied mounting brackets. 56 012DVX-S200-en 56 04.3.1, 11:18 AM Creating the Best Listening Space Yamaha Speaker Stand SPS-200 (Option) With the SPS-200 Speaker Stands, you can set the Front Speakers and Surround Speakers on the floor. (2 stands/set) SPS-200 * SPS-200 stands may not be available in certain regions. Using Commercially Available Speakers or Cables Notes • Use a speaker with 6-ohm impedance or more. If a speaker with less than 6-ohm impedance is used, the protective circuit may trip or the speaker may malfunction. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If these speakers still create interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • Make sure the speaker cable you use is the same thickness as the supplied cable. Creating the Best Listening Space You can use commercially available speakers instead of the supplied Center Speaker, Front Speakers, Surround Speakers, or Subwoofer. You can also use commercially available speaker cables instead of the supplied cables. Advice • Use speakers of the same manufacturer and quality, if possible. If the quality of each speaker differs, the voice of a moving person may become unnatural. English 57 012DVX-S200-en 57 04.3.1, 11:18 AM Creating the Best Listening Space Changing the speaker cables Push up the release button and pull out the supplied speaker cable from the connector. Release button Peel away about 10 mm of covering from the tip of the commercially available cable and firmly twist the cable cores. Not twisting firmly can cause a short. 10 mm Keep pushing up the release button and insert the cable cores of the commercially available cable. Match the speaker cable polarity (+/-) with the polarity indicator (+/-) of the connector. Release button Polarity indicator ⳮ Polarity indicator Ⳮ Release your finger from the release button to fasten the cable. 58 012DVX-S200-en 58 04.3.1, 11:18 AM Creating the Best Listening Space Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level The default settings of the Speakers are suitable for most conditions. However, depending on room conditions or listening position, you may need to adjust the Speaker volume level, especially when changing speaker or furniture position. This adjustment is important because it brings out the maximum effect of the DSP Program, and faithfully reproduces the acoustic personalities of Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Digital and DTS. Even after performing the test tone, you may still like to adjust the speaker volume level for some sources. In this case see page 61, “Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level During Playback”. Note • You cannot adjust the volume level while connected to headphones. To adjust, disconnect your headphones. Adjust the volume so that it is the same for each speaker from your listening position. Note DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER • To adjust the sound, use the Remote Control from your listening position. TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Press AMP. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH Press TEST. A B C D E SLEEP PRESET Creating the Best Listening Space Adjusting the Speaker Balance with a Test Tone PRESET ON SCREEN MENU g CH ENTER g SET MENU CH RETURN STATUS TEST TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE VOLUME +/– AMP AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA English 59 012DVX-S200-en 59 04.3.1, 11:18 AM Creating the Best Listening Space LEFT RIGHT CENTER SUBWOOFER L SUR. R SUR. Adjust the overall sound using the VOLUME +/so that you can hear the test tone. The picture on the left shows the test tone order: LEFT (Front L Speaker) → CENTER (Center Speaker) → RIGHT (Front R Speaker) → R SUR. (Surround R Speaker) → L SUR. (Surround L Speaker) → SUBWOOFER (Subwoofer). Each speaker outputs sound for about 2 seconds. The speaker currently outputting a test tone appears in the CinemaStation Display. While a test tone is outputting from the speaker you want to adjust, press q or w and tune it to the same volume level as the Front Speakers. Only the speaker currently being adjusted produces a test tone. Note • While in test tone mode you cannot adjust the volume level of the Front Speakers which serve as the standard. If you need to adjust the volume level of the Front Speakers, exit the test tone mode and press VOLUME +/-. When adjustment is finished, press TEST. The test tone stops. Advice • If you raise the volume level of the Center and Surround L/R Speakers to + 10 dB and this is still less than the Front Speakers, set the “* F. Level” in the SET MENU to -10 dB and lower the volume level of the Front Speakers by about 1/3. If you change the volume level of the Front Speakers, adjust the volume level of the Center and Surround L/R Speakers once again. Notes • If “* CENTER” in the SET MENU is set to “NON”, the Center Speaker signal is distributed to the Front L/R Speakers at the same volume level and output. In this case, you cannot adjust the audio output level of the Center Speaker. • If “* SUR”. in the SET MENU is set to “NON”, you cannot adjust the volume level of the Surround L/R Speakers. The test tone skips the Surround L/R Speakers and continues its cycle. • If “* BASS” in the SET MENU is set to “FRONT”, the test tone skips the Subwoofer and continues its cycle. • The test tone for Subwoofer is different from the others, but this is not a defect. 60 012DVX-S200-en 60 04.3.1, 11:18 AM Creating the Best Listening Space Adjusting the Speaker Volume Level During Playback Adjust the volume level of the Subwoofer, Center and Surround Left/Right Speakers, if you feel the speaker is unbalanced during audio playback. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER Advice POWER TV /DTS SW + / – AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT CENTER +/– SURR +/– • Volume levels other than for Front Speakers can be adjusted. Press AMP during playback. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH Adjust the speaker volume level. To adjust the Subwoofer volume press SW +/-. To adjust the Center Speaker volume press CENTER +/-. To adjust the Surround Speakers volume press SURR +/-. CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST Creating the Best Listening Space VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA Advice • The volume level adjustment range is +10 dB to -10 dB. • You cannot adjust the Left and Right Surround Speakers individually. The same adjustment level will be applied to both. If the level adjusted during the sound test was different for Left and Right and one speaker was then tuned to a maximum of +10 dB or a minimum of -10 dB, the value cannot be adjusted any further up or down. • We recommend that you first adjust the speaker balance with a test tone. See page 59, “Adjusting the Speaker Balance with a Test Tone”. • If you change the speaker volume level with the SW, CENTER or SURR buttons, the levels you adjust with the test tone also change. Note English • Depending on your settings in SET MENU, volume level adjustment may not be available for a speaker. – If “* CENTER” is set to “NON” you cannot adjust the Center Speaker. – If “* SUR.” is set to “NON” you cannot adjust the Surround Speakers. – If “* BASS” is set to “FRONT” you cannot adjust the Subwoofer. 61 012DVX-S200-en 61 04.3.1, 11:18 AM Creating the Best Listening Space Adjust speaker volume for 5ch Stereo DSP Program You can adjust the speaker volume for 5ch Stereo DSP Program Press AMP during playback. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT Repeatedly press MUSIC and select “5ch Stereo”. SURR SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU h g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU RETURN STATUS Repeatedly press g or h, and select the speaker you want to adjust. The switching order is CT LEV → RL LEV → RR LEV → CT LEV... To adjust the Center Speaker volume level, select CT LEV. To adjust the Surround L Speaker volume level, select RL LEV. To adjust the Surround R Speaker volume level, select RR LEV. TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g AMP AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS MUSIC GAME Press q or w and adjust the speaker volume level. When setting to 50%, the speaker volume becomes half, and when setting to 0%, you hear no sound from the Speaker. CINEMA Advice • You can adjust the speaker volume level from 0 to 100%. The factory default setting is 100%, which is the maximum value. Notes • The volume levels adjusted with the test tone or the CENTER or SURR buttons in 5ch Stereo mode are replaced with the setting with “CT LEV”, “RL LEV” or “RR LEV”. The actual volume you hear is the volume shown in the CinemaStation Display multiplied by the percentage you set for volume level. • If “* CENTER” is set to “NON”, you cannot adjust the Center Speaker. If “* SUR.” is set to “NON”, you cannot adjust the Surround Speakers. 62 012DVX-S200-en 62 04.3.1, 11:18 AM Creating the Best Listening Space Setting the Speaker Size To get the most out of the sound field effects, you need to use all 6 of the supplied speakers (Front, Center, Surround and Subwoofer). But depending on your listening objectives, you can turn off specified speakers. When using any speaker other than YAMAHA Speaker Set NX-P200, you need to specify the speaker size. You can specify these settings in Speaker mode. Setting the Speaker Mode Specify the speaker to produce no sound by setting “* CENTER”, “* SUR.” or “* BASS”. When using other speakers, be sure to set the speaker size, and depending on your listening objectives set the Front Speaker level. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Press AMP. Press SET MENU. “* Speaker Set” appears. A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET Press w. h ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU g CH ENTER g SET MENU CH Press h or g to select item you want to set. RETURN STATUS TEST Press q or w to change the setting. VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g AMP AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA Creating the Best Listening Space SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set the needed item. When exiting the SET MENU, press SET MENU. Pressing any one of the DSP Program buttons also exits the SET MENU. Advice English • Even if “* FRONT” is set to “SML”, when “* BASS” is set to “FRONT”, low tones below 90 Hz of the Front L/R channel signal will output from the Front Speakers. • If you select a sound field effect when “* SUR.” is set to “NON”, CinemaStation enters Virtual Cinema DSP mode. • Settings made in Speaker mode are not reflected when connected to headphones. Note • When a sampling digital signal over 48 kHz is input, some settings may not be reflected in the playback sound. 63 012DVX-S200-en 63 04.3.1, 11:18 AM Creating the Best Listening Space * CENTER * BASS Sets whether the Center Speaker is present or not, and sets the size of the Center Speaker. Selects the speaker to output a LFE/BASS (low tone) signal. Selection items: LRG (Large), SML (Small), NON (None) Default setting: SML Selection items: SWFR (Subwoofer), FRONT, BOTH Default setting: SWFR LRG: Select this setting when using a big Center Speaker. The entire frequency band of the center channel signal is output as it is from the Center Speaker. SML: Select this setting when using a small Center Speaker. A center channel signal with a low tone of 90 Hz or below is output from the speaker set to * BASS. NON: Select this setting when not using a Center Speaker. The center channel signal distributes the same volume level to the Front L/R Speakers. * FRONT Sets the size of the Front Speakers. Selection items: LRG (Large), SML (Small) Default setting: SML LRG: Select this setting when using large Front Speakers. The entire frequency band of the front L/R channel signal is output as it is from the Front Left and Right Speakers. SML: Select this setting when using small Front Speakers. A front L/R channel signal with a low tone of 90 Hz or below is output from the speaker set to * BASS. * SUR. Sets whether the Surround L/R Speakers are present or not, and sets the size of the Surround L/R Speakers. Selection items: LRG (Large), SML (Small), NON (None) Default setting: SML 64 LRG: Select this setting when using large Surround L/R Speakers or when using Surround L/R Speakers with surround subwoofers connected by speaker cables. The entire frequency band of the surround L/R channel signal is output as it is from the Surround Speakers. SML: Select this setting when using small Surround L/R Speakers. A surround L/R channel signal with a low tone of 90 Hz or below is output from the speaker set to * BASS. NON: Select this setting when not using Surround L/R Speakers. The surround L/R channel signal distributes the same volume level to the Front L/ R Speakers. 012DVX-S200-en 64 SWFR: Select this setting when using a Subwoofer. The LFE and low tone (90 Hz and below) sound from other channels, depending on * CENTER, * FRONT and * SUR. settings, are output from the Subwoofer. FRONT: Select this setting when not using a Subwoofer. The LFE and low tone (90 Hz and below) sound from other channels, depending on * CENTER, * FRONT and * SUR. settings, are output from the Front L/R Speakers. BOTH: Select this item to mix low frequence tones of 90 Hz and below with a LFE channel when using a Subwoofer, independent of the Front Speaker Sound mode setting. The entire frequency band of the front L/R channel is output from both the Front L/R Speakers and Subwoofer. Sound can output from the Subwoofer during 2-channel or Dolby Surround playback. Advice • When “BOTH” is selected during Super Audio CD playback, output is only from the subwoofer. * F. Level Selects the Front Speaker level. When the Front Speaker volume level is extremely high and out of alignment with that of other speakers, you can lower the volume level and regain a balance. Selection items: Nrm (Normal), -10 dB Default setting: Nrm Nrm: Usually this setting is selected. -10 dB: Use this setting if the output level of the Center or Surround Speakers is out of alignment with the Front Speakers. The volume level of the Front Speakers decreases 10 dB (about 1/3). 04.3.1, 11:18 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Selecting DSP Program Effects To get the most out of CinemaStation, select a sound field based on how many speakers you want to use and the listening environment. Select a sound field based on how many speakers you want to have sound. Select a sound field based on your listening environment Enjoy original Dolby and DTS sound • For a 6-speaker plus surround back speaker setup, see page 65, “Using Matrix 6.1”. • For a 6-speaker setup, see page 67, “Using All Speakers for CD or Video Playback”. • For a 2-speaker setup, see page 69, “Using Front Speakers Only for DSP Program (Virtual Cinema DSP)”. • For headphones, see page 70, “Using a DSP Program with Headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”)”. • For evening enjoyment, see page 71, “Using a DSP Program with Low Volume (Night Listening)”. • For setting a DSP Program to match your listening room, see page 72, “Changing the Delay Time of a DSP Program”. • To listen to original Dolby or DTS sound as it is, see page 74, “Reproducing the Original Dolby and DTS Sound”. • To listen to stereo sound as it is, see page 75, “Reproducing Stereo Sound”. • CinemaStation cannot use DSP Programs when playing Super Audio CDs. Using Matrix 6.1 Matrix 6.1 sound creates a realistic sense of sonic movement with a surround back sound. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT MATRIX 6.1 SURR In addition to Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES discs, you can also enjoy Matrix 6.1 sound with a 5.1 channel source. Selecting Matrix 6.1 with the MATRIX 6.1 button will enable the Dolby Digital plus Matrix 6.1 and DTS plus Matrix 6.1 decoder. The surround L/R channel will produce a surround back channel, making it possible to output sound from a virtual surround back speaker. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN You can enjoy Dolby Digital plus Matrix 6.1 or DTS plus Matrix 6.1 sound without adjusting any settings when you play a Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES disc. MENU More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Advice SET MENU CH Press AMP. CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP AMP VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Press MATRIX 6.1 to set. The display indicator switches in the following order each time you press MATRIX 6.1 : AUTO (auto-recognition) → Matrix 6.1 (Matrix audio) → OFF → AUTO... GAME English DVD/CD CINEMA 65 013DVX-S200-en 65 04.3.1, 11:19 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects AUTO: When playing back a 6.1 channel source (Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES), the sound is automatically switched either to Dolby Digital plus Matrix 6.1 or DTS plus Matrix 6.1 audio. Even if you play a 5.1 channel source with this setting, no virtual surround back speaker is created. MATRIX 6.1: Select this item to play a 5.1 channel source with Matrix 6.1. Sound outputs from the virtual surround back speaker. OFF: The Matrix 6.1 decoder is not enabled. Even if you play a Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES disc, no sound outputs from the virtual surround back speaker. Advice • When the Matrix 6.1 decoder is working, the MATRIX indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. 6.1 appears beside the DSP Program name (For example: Action 6.1). Matrix 6.1 appears with Dolby Digital and DTS sound fields. Notes • Some Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES discs do not contain a signal (flag) that CinemaStation can use for auto recognition. To play this type of disc with 6.1-channel sound, press MATRIX 6.1 to select Matrix 6.1. • In the cases below, 6.1-channel sound cannot play even if you press MATRIX 6.1. –If “* SUR.” is set to “NON” in the SET MENU. –If sound effect is set to off (Stereo Playback). –If headphones are connected. –If a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is playing. –If you select 5ch Stereo DSP Program. • If you turn on the power once more after CinemaStation goes into standby, Matrix 6.1 returns to AUTO. 66 013DVX-S200-en 66 04.3.1, 11:19 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Using All Speakers for CD or Video Playback Selecting Dolby Pro Logic II converts a 2-channel source into virtual multi-channels for enjoying sound using all speakers. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV AUDIO q/DTS /DTS SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT SW CENTER NIGHT Play the 2-channel source. SUBTITLE ANGLE STEREO A-B SELECT SURR Press AMP. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN Press q/DTS. MENU Press SELECT repeatedly to select “PRO LOGIC II”. SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA English Advice • You can also press the DSP button on CinemaStation to select “PRO LOGIC II Movie” or “PRO LOGIC II Music”. More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects AMP DVD/CD Press q/DTS to select “PRO LOGIC II Movie” or “PRO LOGIC II Music”. Each time the button is pressed the selection switches between “PRO LOGIC II Movie” and “PRO LOGIC II Music”. Match your source with the appropriate selection item, Movie or Music. Note • Even if you play back a monaural source with Dolby Pro Logic II, CinemaStation cannot reproduce multi-channel sound. 67 013DVX-S200-en 67 04.3.1, 11:19 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Change the Dolby Pro Logic II Music setting You can change the settings (parameters) for Dolby Pro Logic II Music and adjust the sound field to match your listening space. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER Perform steps 1 to 5 in “Using All Speakers for CD or Video Playback” on page 67, and select “PRO LOGIC II Music”. POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT SURR Press h or g repeatedly to select “PANORAMA”, “DIM.” or “CT WIDTH”. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET Press q or w to change the setting value. PRESET ON SCREEN MENU h g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU Repeat steps 2 and 3 if you want to change other setting values. RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g Below are the “Pro Logic II Music” setting values (parameters). AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS CINEMA GAME PANORAMA Gives front L/R channel sound a wraparound effect, distributed throughout the entire surround sound field, for an expansive feeling. Function: Expands the front sound field of Dolby Pro Logic II. Selection item: OFF/ON Default setting: OFF DIM. (Dimension) Adjusts the difference in volume between front and surround channels to the volume balance you desire. Function: Adjusts the difference between front surround sound field and surround volume. Variable range: -3 (stronger toward the surround direction) to +3 (stronger toward the front direction). Default setting: STD (Standard) CT WIDTH Distributes the center channel sound to the left and right. Function: Expands audio from the front sound field to the left and right. Variable range: 0 to 7. If set to 0 center channel sound will only output from Center Speaker. As the value rises center channel sound is incrementally distributed to the L/R Speakers. When set to 7, sound will only output from the L/R Speakers. Default setting: 3 68 013DVX-S200-en 68 04.3.1, 11:19 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Using Front Speakers Only for DSP Program (Virtual Cinema DSP) Since Virtual Cinema DSP processes the sound input source, you can virtually reproduce surround speakers, and enjoy a DSP Program with only your Front L/R Speakers. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Play the source. SHIFT Press AMP. TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET Select a DSP Program. h ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU g CH ENTER g SET MENU CH RETURN STATUS Set “* SUR.” to “NON” in the SET MENU. See page 63, “Setting the Speaker Mode”. TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects AMP AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME DSP Program buttons CINEMA Advice • For Virtual Cinema DSP, the VIRTUAL indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. Notes English In the cases below, even if “* SUR.” is set to “NON” in the SET MENU, Virtual Cinema DSP does not function. • When you select the following DSP Programs: 5ch Stereo; PL Normal; Dolby Digital Normal or DTS Normal; PL II Movie or PL II Music. • When sound field effects are off (Stereo Playback). • When a digital audio sampling frequency over 48 kHz is input. • When using a test tone. • When listening through headphones. 69 013DVX-S200-en 69 04.3.1, 11:19 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Using a DSP Program with Headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) Connect your headphones to the (phones) jack on CinemaStation and enjoy multi-speaker simulation called “SILENT CINEMA”. Connect your headphones to the jack on CinemaStation. (phones) Play the source. Select a DSP Program. (phones) jack RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME DSP Program buttons CINEMA Advice • • • • When “SILENT CINEMA” is on, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. CinemaStation mixes LFE channel audio and other channel audio. When headphones are connected, sound does not output from any speaker regardless of whether sound field effect is on or off. When you do not select any DSP Program, the headphone produces normal stereo sound. Note • If CinemaStation inputs a digital audio sampling frequency over 48 kHz, “SILENT CINEMA” does not function. 70 013DVX-S200-en 70 04.3.1, 11:19 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Using a DSP Program with Low Volume (Night Listening) You can control the big sound effects and focus on listening clearly to speech. Enjoy a DSP Program even in the evening at a low volume. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER Play the source. TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT NIGHT SURR Press AMP. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET Select a DSP Program. PRESET ON SCREEN MENU Press NIGHT to activate Night Listening mode. “Night L. ON” appears in the CinemaStation Display. SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS GAME DSP Program buttons CINEMA More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects AMP DVD/CD To return to normal play Press NIGHT to deactivate Night Listening mode. “Night L. OFF” appears in the CinemaStation Display. English Advice • All DSP Programs are available in Night Listening mode. • Night Listening mode does not work when listening through headphones. 71 013DVX-S200-en 71 04.3.1, 11:19 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Changing the Delay Time of a DSP Program Each DSP Program is designed to draw out the maximum effect from the source audio. CinemaStation provides the DSP Programs with optimum value of parameters including reflected sound, reverberant sound and Delay Time. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR q/DTS /DTS NIGHT SELECT Delay Time is the time gap in playback between front speaker audio and surround speaker audio. The bigger the value becomes the later the surround audio plays back, and the bigger the sound space feels. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU h g CH ENTER g SET MENU CH Among these parameters, you can change the Delay Time to match to your Speaker positions. Delay Time is preset at an optimum value for each DSP Program. In most cases, the default value will work well for your listening enjoyment. But depending on the audio source or listening environment, you can adjust each DSP Program the way you like. RETURN STATUS TEST Play the source. VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g AMP AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS CINEMA Press AMP. GAME DSP Program buttons Select a DSP Program. To select a Movie, Music, Sports, or Game DSP Program, press the appropriate DSP Program button (MOVIE, MUSIC, SPORTS or GAME). To select a Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS, after pressing q/DTS, repeatedly press SELECT until you come to the item you want. Press h or g. The DELAY indicator appears in the CinemaStation Display. Press q or w to adjust the Delay Time. Advice • You can also adjust the Delay Time of Matrix 6.1 DSP Program. Notes • Depending on the source it is possible to over or under adjust the Delay Time and create an unnatural sound effect. • While adjusting the Delay Time, you hear no sound temporarily. 72 013DVX-S200-en 72 04.3.1, 11:19 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Default values for Delay Time Program Group MOVIE Program Name 1 2 3 4 5 MUSIC SPORTS Default Setting (ms) Action 20 Action 6.1 15 Drama 20 Drama 6.1 15 Sci-Fi 20 Sci-Fi 6.1 15 Spectacle 23 Spectacle 6.1 15 Theater 20 Theater 6.1 1 Music Video Program Name Default Setting (ms) PL Normal (Dolby Pro Logic) 15 Normal (Dolby Digital, DTS) 5 Matrix 6.1 (Dolby Digital, DTS) 5 PL II Movie (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) 15 PL II Music (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) 5 5 21 2 Classic Hall 30 3 Jazz Club 30 4 Rock Concert 15 1 Live Sports 10 1 Game 36 More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects GAME Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic and DTS English 73 013DVX-S200-en 73 04.3.1, 11:19 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Reproducing the Original Dolby and DTS Sound You can play back and enjoy movie sound processed with Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic or DTS. Enjoy smooth, precise and flowing audio of the original sound design. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV AUDIO q/DTS /DTS SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT SW CENTER NIGHT Play the source. SUBTITLE ANGLE STEREO A-B SELECT SURR Press AMP. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN Press q/DTS. The suitable Program is selected depending on the input source. Dolby Digital: Normal appears, and qindicator lights up. DTS: Normal appears, and t indicator lights up. When the 2-channel source (Dolby Pro Logic) is selected, first, press q/DTS. Then, press SELECT to select PL Normal. MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA 74 013DVX-S200-en 74 04.3.1, 11:19 AM More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects Reproducing Stereo Sound You can enjoy the 2-channel (stereo sound) source only with the Front L/R Speakers. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER Play the source. POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT STEREO Press AMP. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E Press STEREO. The STEREO indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. If sound field effects are off, you will have normal stereo playback. Press STEREO once more to turn on the sound field effect. SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE More Information about DSP (Surround) Effects AMP AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA Advice • If “* BASS” in the SET MENU is set to “BOTH” or “* FRONT” is set to “SML”, a low tone is output from the Subwoofer. Notes English • If sound field effects are off, no sound will output from the Center Speaker or Surround L/R Speakers. • The volume may become very low if you turn off sound field effects and set “* D. Range” to “MIN” in the SET MENU. In this case, turn on sound field effects. • If sound field effects are off and you play Dolby Digital or DTS audio, the volume balance of the Front L/R Speakers may be disturbed. This is because the dynamic range becomes compressed and the channel sound set in “* Speaker Set” in the SET MENU mixes and outputs with the front L/R channel sound. 75 013DVX-S200-en 75 04.3.1, 11:19 AM Types of Input Signals Types of Input Signals You can check the type of input signal and format from the CinemaStation Display. You can also set the input mode to select the digital/analog entry sequence or to only input a specified signal. Checking Sound Information (Input Signal Information Display) During playback, you can show input signal type, format and sampling frequency information in the CinemaStation Display. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV AUDIO /DTS SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT SW CENTER NIGHT Play the source. SUBTITLE ANGLE STEREO A-B STEREO SURR Press AMP. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN Press STEREO. Stereo playback begins. MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST g VOLUME TV VOL Press g. Input signal information appears. Depending on the input source, input signal information changes each time you press g. MUTE AMP AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA 76 014DVX-S200-en 76 04.3.1, 11:20 AM Types of Input Signals Input signal information Note on digital signals that exceed 48 kHz ■ (Format) Shows the input signal format. When the digital input cannot be recognized, the mode is set to analog. CinemaStation’s digital input jack can input a sampling frequency up to 96 kHz. For details read the owner’s manual of the device connected to the digital input jack. Keep in mind the points below when inputting a digital signal that exceeds 48 kHz. • DSP Programs are not selectable. You can only listen to normal 2-channel stereo from the Front Speakers. • During playback, you cannot adjust the volume level of Center and Surround L/R Speakers. • Depending on the “* Speaker Set” setting in the SET MENU, the Subwoofer may output sound. Input Signal Format Display Analog Audio Analog PCM Audio PCM Dolby Digital Audio Dolby DGTL DTS Audio DTS Other Digital Signals Unknwn DGTL ■ (Audio Channels) Shows the number of audio channels an input signal contains (only when Dolby Digital or DTS is input). For example, “in: 3/2/LFE” indicates 3 Front Channels, 2 Surround Channels and LFE. “1+1” indicates Main + Sub in bilingual broadcasts or other 2 channel audio, and MLT indicates 3-channel or more multi-channel audio. Types of Input Signals ■ fs Shows the frequency sampling of an input signal (only when digital signal is input). If the sampling frequency cannot be measured, “unknown” appears. ■ rate (bit rate) Shows the amount of data an input signal contains per second (only Dolby Digital and DTS). If the bit rate cannot be measured, “unknown” appears. ■ flg (flag) Shows a recognition signal (flag), in an input signal and initiates an action (only Dolby Digital and DTS). If the flag cannot be recognized, “None” appears. English 77 014DVX-S200-en 77 04.3.1, 11:20 AM Types of Input Signals Switching Input Modes You can playback most sources without a problem with the AUTO setting (factory default setting). Then depending on your needs, you can select the priority level for digital and analog input signals, and specify formats such as DTS. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Press the Input Selection button for current input source until the desired input mode appears in the CinemaStation Display. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E AUTO: SLEEP PRESET PRESET ON SCREEN DTS: ANLG: MENU Input signal can be selected in the order below. 1) Digital signal 2) Analog signal Only DTS can be played. Only analog signal can be played. SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC CINEMA SPORTS GAME Input Selection buttons Learning about input modes, jacks and Input Selection buttons CinemaStation can receive signals from the VIDEO 1 (analog), VIDEO 2 (analog), VCR (analog), MD/CD-R (analog), and OPTICAL (digital) jacks of connected equipment. You can assign a VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR or MD/CD-R input name to the OPTICAL IN jack. This will allow you to use the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR or MD/CD-R button to input a device connected to the OPTICAL IN jack (MD/CD-R is assigned in the default setting.) Normally, an analog signal is input to the VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR or MD/CD-R IN jack, and a digital signal is input to the OPTICAL IN jack. However, by setting the input mode to AUTO the input will be automatically detected and you can then playback audio from the device you want by simply pressing an Input Selection button. Notes • U.K. and Europe models only have VIDEO instead of VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2. • VIDEO is used as VIDEO 1 in above models. Advice • It is possible to switch Input mode even if you press INPUT on CinemaStation for more than one second. • When Input mode is set to AUTO and a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the most suitable decoder is automatically selected. • The following happens when set to Input mode and DTS is played: — CinemaStation detects the DTS signal and automatically switch to DTS mode (t indicator lights up). Once DTS audio finishes playback, the t indicator may blink, and while it blinks only DTS audio can be played back. Immediately after DTS audio finishes playback, if you want to play normal PCM audio, reset the Input mode to AUTO. — If the DTS signal is interrupted when you perform Search or Skip, the t indicator may blink. If this condition continues for over 30 seconds, the Input mode automatically changes from DTS to normal digital (PCM) and the t goes out. • Using “* Input Mode” in the SET MENU you can set whether to use the Input mode specified previously when CinemaStation was turned on or return to AUTO. Notes • It is not possible to select ANLG with the DVD/CD Input Selection button. • You cannot switch input modes when the input jack you select with the Input Selection button can only accept an analog input signal. • To play back DTS, set the Input mode to AUTO or DTS. Do not set it to ANLG. If you do, audio may not output or you may hear noise. 78 014DVX-S200-en 78 04.3.1, 11:20 AM Additional Features Using the Sleep Timer After a specified time the power automatically enters standby so you can enjoy CinemaStation until you fall asleep. Play the source. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT Repeatedly press SLEEP and set the time to enter standby mode. The CinemaStation Display changes as shown below. SURR SHIFT SLEEP 120 min TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET SLEEP SLEEP 90 min SLEEP 60 min ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU CH SLEEP 30 min CH ENTER RETURN STATUS SLEEP OFF TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE Once the Sleep Timer is set a SLEEP indicator lights up in the CinemaStation Display. AMP VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME To cancel the Sleep Timer Keep pressing SLEEP until SLEEP OFF appears in the CinemaStation Display. In a few seconds SLEEP OFF disappears. The CinemaStation Display once again shows the DSP Program and the SLEEP indicator disappears. CINEMA • You cannot link the sleep timer of the device that is playing, so make sure to set the sleep timer of each device separately. • The Sleep Timer cancels if you press POWER on the Remote Control, press STANDBY/ON on CinemaStation or pull out the power cord. • Memory backup remembers the previous setting so you can use the same setting next time. English Advice Additional Features DVD/CD 79 015DVX-S200-en 79 04.3.1, 11:20 AM Additional Features Enjoying High-Quality Video Progressive Scan (NTSC only) The COMPONENT VIDEO jack on CinemaStation is compatible with Progressive Scan. You can enjoy highly defined images without flicker when connecting to a television that has a component video input jack compatible with Progressive Scan. Progressive Scan is available only for NTSC signal output. See pages 95 and 96, “On Screen Menu Guide”. Please... • Before connecting make sure to turn off the television and CinemaStation power. Connect the television. Use a commercially available component video cable. COMPONENT VIDEO (480p/480i) (DVD ONLY) Y PB PR AM ANT MONITOR OUT Y GND PB IN OUT FM ANT PR 75 UNBAL SUBWOOFER OUT OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO SYSTEM CONNECTOR Start playing the DVD. See page 10, “Viewing a DVD”. Press PROGRESSIVE on CinemaStation. PROGRESSIVE The PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up. To cancel Progressive Scan Press PROGRESSIVE to turn off the PROGRESSIVE indicator. Advice • If you play video with a 4:3 aspect ratio on a 16:9 wide television screen, Progressive Scan may fill the screen top to bottom. In this case, use the On Screen Menu to change to the screen display that matches your television. See pages 95 and 96, “On Screen Menu Guide”. If you cannot adjust the size, turn off Progressive Scan. (Changes to interlace output.) • When Progressive Scan is on, a video signal will only output from the COMPONENT VIDEO. You can use the COMPONENT VIDEO jack and Progressive Scan only for DVD playback, so it is not possible to enjoy progressive playback from other sources. Note CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT YOU SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE “STANDARD DEFINITION” OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING YOUR VIDEO MONITOR COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS UNIT, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER. This unit is compatible with the complete line of YAMAHA projectors, including the DPX-1, LPX-500, DPX-1000 and with the YAMAHA PDM-1 plasma display. 80 015DVX-S200-en 80 04.3.1, 11:20 AM Additional Features Protecting Your Children from Undesirable Material Using Parental Control You can cut a scene that you do not feel it is suitable for your children, or lock a disc from being played. CinemaStation allows you to set the level of Parental Control. It then checks the level of a disc whose level has been set in advance and automatically decides if the content is suitable for viewing by your children before playing. Setting the Password and Parental Control Level Press ON SCREEN. Program Number DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER Preferences POWER TV AUDIO /DTS Toolbar Play Option Setup Search SUBTITLE ANGLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT View Number buttons SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH Press g to select “Setup”. A B C D E SLEEP PRESET ON SCREEN MENU h Preferences Access Toolbar TV Setup Language Audio Menu g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU Features RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g Press w and h a number of times to select “Access”. AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 Additional Features ON SCREEN PRESET Disc lock Parental level MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME Access Enter PIN TV Change PIN CINEMA Language Press w to select “Enter PIN”, then press w. Disc lock Parental level Enter PIN **** Change PIN English Advice • The default password is 0000. • If the password you input is wrong, some menu items, such as Parental level or Disc Lock, are grayed out. Enter the correct password. • If you forget your password, press s four times, instead of the Number buttons. 81 015DVX-S200-en 81 04.3.1, 11:20 AM Additional Features Use the Number buttons to enter a password (4 digits). DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Disc lock Number buttons Parental level Enter PIN SHIFT **** Change PIN TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET ON SCREEN PRESET ON SCREEN MENU h Press h and select “Parental level”. g CH ENTER g SET MENU CH Disc lock RETURN STATUS Parental level 0 TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g Enter PIN Change PIN AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Press w or q and select control level (0 to 8). 0: Parental Control is set to off, and you can play all discs. 1 to 7: You can play discs of same level or below the level you set. The smaller the number the stricter Parental Control is. 8: You can play all discs. GAME CINEMA Disc lock Parental level +3 Enter PIN Change PIN Press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen Menu. Change the password DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER Perform steps 1 to 5 in “Setting the Password and Parental Control Level” on page 81. POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Number buttons Enter the current password (4 digits) with the Number buttons. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH Press g to select Change PIN, then press w. A B C D E SLEEP PRESET ON SCREEN PRESET ON SCREEN MENU Enter the new password (4 digits) with the Number buttons. h g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU Enter the new password (4 digits) again for confirmation. RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g Press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen Menu. 82 015DVX-S200-en 82 04.3.1, 11:20 AM Additional Features Locking a Disc Disc lock is a function that restricts the playback of a video disc. Setting the disc lock to on enables the lock and disables disc playback. However, each time a disc is inserted, it is possible to play it by selecting a playback restriction method “Play once” or “Play always”, then entering your password. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Number buttons Perform steps 1 to 5 in “Setting the password and Parental Control Level” (Page 81). SHIFT Press the h key a number of times and select the disc lock. TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET ON SCREEN PRESET ON SCREEN MENU h CH ENTER g g CH Disc lock Off Parental level SET MENU Enter PIN RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME After pressing the w key, press the h key and select On. Disc lock On Parental level Off Enter PIN As long as a password is not entered playback will not be possible. Select Off if you do not want to lock. When you are finished with the setting press the ON SCREEN key and the On Screen Menu will close. Additional Features CINEMA g How to enter a password and begin playback Insert a disc. A selection window with “Play once” and “Play always” will appear on the TV screen. Use the h key or g key to select “Play once” or “Play always”. After pressing the w key enter a password using the number keys. Playback starts. English Advice • The identification data of a disc that is played when the disc lock is on is stored in CinemaStation’s memory. The next time the disc is played the restriction method selected previously is applied. If you select “Play once”, the next time the disc is played the selection window will appear. However, if you select “Play always”, the next time the disc is played the selection window will not appear. After appears on the screen, press s within about 10 seconds. • The memory can only store identification data for up to 120 discs. If you play the 121st disc, the identification data of the first disc (oldest) will be erased from memory. 83 015DVX-S200-en 83 04.3.1, 11:20 AM Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control Storing Manufacturer Codes in the Remote Control If you set the manufacturer code (a unique code assigned to each manufacturer) in the CinemaStation Remote Control, you can operate a connected television, VCR, CD or MD recorder with the Remote Control. • Depending on the model, the Remote Control may not work, or only work with a limited number of functions. In this case, use the remote control that came with the television, VCR, CD or MD recorder. Setting the Manufacturer Code When a manufacturer code is set for the TV button, VCR button or MD/CD-R button, you can begin using the features described in “Available Operations” on page 85. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT SURR TV Number buttons SHIFT SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET • For the TV button you can only set a television manufacturer code and for the VCR button or MD/CD-R button you can only set a VCR, CD or MD recorder manufacturer code. While holding down SHIFT, press TV, VCR or MD/ CD-R. Each button can be assigned one manufacturer code. PRESET ON SCREEN • Perform steps 1 to 2 while holding down SHIFT. MENU SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 VCR MD/CD-R MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME While holding down SHIFT, enter the manufacturer code (3 digits) of the device with the Number buttons. For details, refer to “Manufacturer Code List” on pages 87 and 88. When the setting succeeds, “Code Set OK” appears; however, when it does not, “Code Set NG” appears in the CinemaStation Display. If setting is unsuccessful, perform steps 1 and 2 again. When finished entering the code, release your finger from SHIFT. CINEMA • The TV button has 299, the VCR button has 399 and the MD/CD-R button has 499 as the factory default setting for manufacturer code. Make sure that you set the correct manufacturer code. With a manufacturer code set for the TV button, press the button to turn the TV power on/off (standby), and check that the setting is working correctly. With a manufacturer code set for the VCR button or the MD/CD-R button, press the button then the features described in “Available Operations” on page 85, and check that the setting is working correctly. 84 016DVX-S200-en 84 04.3.1, 11:21 AM Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control When the Remote Control’s TV, VCR or MD/ CD-R button does not work even after setting the device manufacturer code To return to the factory default settings While pressing SHIFT down as in step 2 Setting the Manufacturer Code, enter 299 for TV, 399 for VCR and 499 for MD/CD-R. (Step 3 is not necessary.) Try again from step 1 and keep the following points in mind. • Make sure you select the Remote Control’s TV, VCR or MD/CD-R button correctly when setting the manufacturer code. • If there are multiple manufacturer codes enter them in order. • After reinserting batteries, try the steps again (within 2 minutes of reinserting). (When reinserting batteries be careful not to press the Remote Control buttons. If a manufacturer code has been set for the TV, VCR or MD/CD-R button, it may get deleted.) Maintaining manufacturer code settings Replace batteries before they become unusable. When the batteries wear out and you remove them, the custom manufacturer code setting will stay in memory for about 2 minutes. Be careful because if more than 2 minutes elapse the codes may be deleted. Also, at this time, be careful not to accidentally press a Remote Control button. This can delete the codes. Available Operations While you set the manufacturer code for the TV, MD/CD-R or VCR button, you can use the following functions after you press the TV, MD/CD-R or VCR button. VCR operation DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT *1TV POWER SURR SHIFT *1TV Channel Selection (+) *1TV Input Switch TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E 1 * TV Channel Selection (-) SLEEP PRESET Stop PRESET Rewind Fast Forward Pause ON SCREEN MENU Playback SET MENU Video Channel Selection (-) CH CH ENTER Video Channel Selection (+) RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL 1 Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control POWER MUTE * TV Volume (+) *1TV Volume (-) AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS English MOVIE Press VCR or MD/CD-R before starting operations. GAME CINEMA *1While you set the TV manufacturer code for the TV button, you can operate your television. 85 016DVX-S200-en 85 04.3.1, 1:09 PM Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control TV operation DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER Press POWER before starting operations. TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER NIGHT SURR SHIFT Channel Selection (+) Input Switch TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E Channel Selection (-) 2 * VCR Rewind *2VCR Stop SLEEP PRESET PRESET *2VCR Fast Forward *2VCR Pause ON SCREEN MENU *2VCR Playback SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST Volume (+) VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP Volume (-) DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS GAME CINEMA *2While you set the VCR manufacturer code for the VCR button or the MD/CD-R button, you can operate your VCR. CD or MD recorder operation DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Track Selection/Elapsed Time Input SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH Pause A B C D E SLEEP PRESET Stop PRESET Reverse Search Forward Search Forward Skip Reverse Skip ON SCREEN MENU Playback SET MENU CH CH ENTER RETURN STATUS TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Press MD/CD-R or VCR before starting operations. GAME CINEMA 86 016DVX-S200-en 86 04.3.1, 11:21 AM Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control Manufacturer Code List Depending on the model and year, you may not be able to use some manufacturer products. In this case, use the remote control supplied with each product. TV Manufacturer Manufacturer Code Manufacturer Manufacturer Code Manufacturer Manufacturer Code Yamaha 299/292 Funai 277/278/285 Portland 297/256/287 Admiral 292/293 Futuretec 285 Quasar 234/235 Aiko 287 GE 293/297/234/235/236 Radio Shack 299/293/297/285/286 Aiwa 294/276/283 Gibralter 297 RCA Akai 295/296 LG/Goldstar 297/298/239/237 293/297/234/256/257/ 258 Alba 296 Goodmans 296/298/223 Realistic 299/293/297/285/286 SABA 223/269/265/266 AOC 297/286 Grundig 229/238/249 Audiovox 285 Harvard 285 Sampo 286/297 Samsung 297/239/248/262/275/ 286 Sanyo 295/233/279/272/273/ 274 Belcor 297 Hitachi 297/239/242/243 Bell & Howell 292 ICE 296 Bestar 298 Irradio 296 Blaupunkt 229/222 Itt/Nokia 244/245 Schneider 296 297/285 Blue sky 298 JC Penny 293/297/234/237/286 Scott Bradford 285 JVC (Victor) 296/246/247 Sharp 292/239/232/284 297 Brandt 223 Kendo 298 Shogun Brocsonic 297 Kenwood 297 Siemens 229 292 297 KTV 297/239/285 Bush 296 Loewe 298/248 Sony 263 285 Candle 286/297 LXI 293/297/225/226/233 Soundesign Citizen 286/287/297 Magnavox 297/225/239/286 SSS 285/297 285 Clatronic 298 Marantz 286/297 Starlite Contec 285 Matsui 295 Sylvania 297/225/286 297/285/287 Craig 224/285 MGA 286/297 Teknika Croslex 225 Mitsubishi 299/297/259 Telefunken 269/264/265/266 223/266 Crown 285 MTC 286/297 Thomson Curtis Mathis 297/226/286 Multitec 285 Toshiba 292/226/267 297/242 297/239/232/286 285 NEC 297/252/282/286 Daewoo 297/298/224/227/228/ 287 Nikko 286/287/297 Wards Nokia 244/245 Daytron 239/297 Nokia Oceanic 245 Dual 298 Nordmende 265/266 Dumont 297 NTC 287 Emerson 297/224/239/232/285 Onwa 296/285 Envision 286/297 Panasonic 234/235/236/253 Ferguson 223/265/266 Philco 297/225/239/286 First line 298 Philips 225 Fisher 295/233 Pilot 297 Fraba 298 Pioneer 226/235/254/255/268 English CXC Videch Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control Brokwood Signature 87 016DVX-S200-en 87 04.3.1, 11:21 AM Operating Other Equipment with the CinemaStation Remote Control VCR Manufacturer Manufacturer Code Manufacturer Manufacturer Code Manufacturer Manufacturer Code Lloyd 397 Sharp 395/362/382 Yamaha 399/392/393/394 Loewe 396/337 Siemens 393 Admiral 395 Luxor 395 Signature 2000 395/397 Aiwa 396/397/398/329/339 LXI 393/396/397/336/349 Sony Akai 322/323/324 Magnavox 325/326/328 368/379/372/373/374/ 375 Asha 363 Magnin 363 Sylvania 397/325/326/328 Audio Dynamic 392/394 Marantz 392/394/328 Audiovox 396 Marta 396 Beaumark 363 Matsui 396 Bell & Howell 393 MEI 328 Blaupunkt 325/326 Memorex 328/336/363/396/397 Brocsonic 327 Minolta 333/349/342 Mitsubishi Bush 322 Calix 396 Candle 335/363/396 Canon 325/328 CGM 396/332 Citizen 396 Craig 396/363 Curtis Mathis 397/328/333/392 Cybernex 363 Daewoo 328/334/335 DBX 392/394 Dimensia 333 Dynatech 397 399/344/348/359/352/ 353 Symphonic 397 Tandberg 334 Tashiro 396 Tatung 392/394 Teac 392/394/397 Technics 325/328 Teknika 328/396/397 Telefunken 376/377 MTC 363/397 Thorn 393/396 Multitech 397/348/354 Toshiba 335/369/389 NEC 392/394/344/383 Totevision 363/396 Nikko 396 Universum 396/327/376 Noblex 363 Vector Research 392 Nokia 393/395 Videosonic 363 Nokia Oceanic 395 W.WHouse 396 Okano 323 Wards Olympic 325/328 395/396/336/362/328/ 342/363/397 Optimus 396 Orion 327 Panasonic 325/328/355/378/384/ 385 Yamaha 499 422/423 CD recorder Manufacturer Manufacturer Code Electrohome 396 Electrophonic 396 Pentax 333/349/342 DENON Emerson 327/334/396/397 Philco 325/328 Hitachi 424 Fisher 393/336 Philips 425/428 Funai 397 325/326/328/337/356/ 357 JVC (Victor) Kenwood 422 Garrard 397 Phonola 337 Marantz 422 GE 328/333/387/363 Pilot 396 Philips 422 LG/Goldstar 396/388/392 Pioneer 325 Pioneer 426 Goodmans 334/337 Quasar 325/328 Sony 427 Grandiente 397 Radio Shack 396/397 Teac 429 Grundig 332/338 Radix 396 Hitachi 325/333/349/342/343 RCA/PROSCAN 325/326/328/333/335/ 349/358/369/363/342 Harman Kardon 392 Realistic Instant Replay 325/328 393/397/328/336/359/ 362/396 Itt/Nokia 393 JCL 328 JC Penny 392/393/394/328/333/ 349/363/396 JVC (Victor) 392/394/344/345/346/ 347 Kendo 396 Kenwood 392/394/396 Kodak 396 MD recorder Manufacturer Manufacturer Code Yamaha 599/522/598 523/524 Samsung 354/358/363/364/365/ 366/335 Denon JVC (Victor) 525 Sansui 394 Kenwood 526 Sanyo 393/336/367/363 Onkyo 592 Schneider 337 Pioneer 527 Scott 399/335/336/348/359/ 352/354/358 Sharp 528 Sears 328/342/396 Seleco 322 Sony 522 Teac 593 88 016DVX-S200-en 88 04.3.1, 11:21 AM Using the SET MENU Using the SET MENU You can use the SET MENU to adjust settings, including Speaker settings. Change the settings to match your listening environment. SET MENU List The SET MENU contains the items below. Item Default Setting (value) * Speaker Set * CENTER SML * FRONT SML * SUR. SML * BASS SWFR * F. Level Nrm * LFE Level * SP LFE 0 dB * HP LFE 0 dB * SP Delay * CENTER 0 ms * SA-CD Delay * CENTER 0 ms * SUR. 0 ms * D. Range MAX * HP D.R MAX * L/R Balance Center * HP Tone CTRL * HP BASS 0 dB * HP TRBL 0 dB Using the SET MENU * SP D.R * Input Assign * OPT: MD/CD-R * Input Mode * MODE: AUTO * Display set * DIMMER 0 * Tuner Step AM9/FM50 (Asia, Korea and General models only) English Advice • Even during playback you can change settings in the SET MENU. • To learn more about “* Speaker Set” read “Setting the Speaker Mode” on page 63. 89 017DVX-S200-en 89 04.3.1, 11:21 AM Using the SET MENU Navigating the SET MENU Press AMP. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER Press SET MENU. POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Press h or g repeatedly to select the Menu you want. SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E SLEEP PRESET h PRESET ON SCREEN MENU SET MENU Press q or w. Once in the setting mode of the selected menu the current setting appears in the CinemaStation Display. Depending on the item, press h or g to enter a submenu. g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU RETURN STATUS Press q or w repeatedly to change the setting. TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g AMP AMP DVD/CD MD/CD-R MOVIE VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MUSIC SPORTS When exiting the SET MENU, press SET MENU. Pressing any one of DSP Program buttons also exits the SET MENU. GAME CINEMA 90 017DVX-S200-en 90 04.3.1, 11:22 AM Using the SET MENU Adjust the playback level of the LFE signal (* LFE Level) You can adjust the LFE channel output level while playing a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. Adjust the LFE level to match the performance of the Subwoofer and headphones. Submenu: SP LFE, HP LFE Variable range (dB): -20 to 0 dB. Default setting: 0 dB Set the Delay Time of the Center Speaker (* SP Delay) You can set the Delay Time of the Center Speaker. This is effective when the Center Speaker outputs sound during Dolby Digital, DTS and other forms of playback. Normally the Center Speaker and Front L/R Speakers are placed in line with each other. However, they should be placed at an equal distance from the listener so that the sound each one outputs enters the listener’s ear at the same time. With Delay Time, the Center Speaker can be moved to an ideal position further away to match the distance of each speaker to the listener. Center Delay is effective in adding depth to the sound field and presence to speech. Set the Delay Time of the Center and Surround Speakers during Super Audio CD playback (* SA-CD Delay) You can set the Delay Time of the Center and Surround Speakers when playing Super Audio CDs containing front-channel sound or surround-channel sound. Normally the Center Speaker and Front L/R Speakers are placed in line with each other and the Surround Speakers are placed behind the listener. For best results place them at an equal distance from the listener so that the sound each one outputs enters the listener’s ear at the same time. Use Delay Time to move the virtual position of the Center Speaker or the Surround Speakers to an ideal position further away to match the distance of each speaker to the listener. Center Delay and Surround Delay add depth to instrument sound and create the expansive feeling of a concert hall. Submenu: CENTER, SUR. Variable range: CENTER 0 to 5 ms, SUR. 0 to 15 ms Press w to set the speaker’s virtual position further away. Press q to set it closer. Virtual Center Speaker Position Variable range (ms): 0 to 5 ms Default setting: 0 ms C L C R Virtual Center Speaker Position C L LS RS LS RS R C Using the SET MENU Press w to set the speaker’s virtual position further away. Press q to set it closer. Virtual Surround Speakers Position Advice RR RL • Every 1 ms increase in Delay Time increases the distance away from the listening position by 30 cm (1 foot). Advice English • Every 1 ms increase in Delay Time increases the distance away from the listening position by 30 cm (1 foot). 91 017DVX-S200-en 91 04.3.1, 11:22 AM Using the SET MENU Set the dynamic range during Dolby Digital playback (* D. Range) You can select the dynamic range (spread between the max. and min. volume) of Dolby Digital playback from 3 levels. Submenu: SP D.R, HP D.R Selection items: MAX (Maximum), STD (Standard), MIN (Minimum) Default setting: MAX MAX: Plays back the dynamic range of the source at the maximum limit. STD: Dynamic range recommended by software manufacturers for home use. MIN: Easy to hear even at a low volume, dynamic range suitable for evening listening. Note • Depending on the Dolby Digital playback source, the MIN dynamic range may not work and result in an extremely low volume. In this case, set the dynamic range to MAX or STD. Adjust the volume balance of the Front Speakers (* L/R Balance) You can set the volume balance of the Front L/R Speakers. This setting also applies to Headphones. Variable range: L/R 10 levels Default setting: Center Press w to make the sound smaller in the Front Left Speaker, and press q to make the sound smaller in the Front Right Speaker. You cannot turn off the sound for either one of the Front Speaker. Adjust the sound quality of headphones (* HP Tone CTRL) You can adjust the low tones (BASS) and high tones (TRBL) of your headphones. Submenu: HP BASS, HP TRBL Variable range (dB): -6 to +3 dB. Default setting: 0 dB Press w to increase the range of the low or high tones. Press q to decrease the range. Reassign input jacks (* Input Assign) You can assign CinemaStation’s OPTICAL IN jack to VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR or MD/CD-R. When the source is set to one of them, press the appropriate input selection button to operate the device connected to the OPTICAL IN jack and the input source name appears on the display panel based on your selection. Selection items: MD/CD-R, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2, VCR Default setting: MD/CD-R Notes • U.K. and Europe models only have VIDEO instead of VIDEO 1 and VIDEO 2. • VIDEO is used as VIDEO 1 in above models. Set the input mode when powering on (* Input Mode) Set the input mode for powering on when playback devices are connected to both digital and analog jacks. Selection items: AUTO, LAST Default setting: AUTO AUTO: When CinemaStation power is turned on the input mode automatically sets to AUTO. LAST: The last selected input mode is applied as is. Adjust the CinemaStation Display brightness (* Display set) Dimmer You can adjust the CinemaStation Display brightness. Variable range: -4 to 0 Default setting: 0 Press w to increase the brightness. Press q to decrease the brightness. Set frequency step (* Tuner Step) (Asia, Korea and General models only) The inter-station frequency spacing differs depending on the areas. Set the frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Selection items: AM9/FM50, AM10/FM100 Default setting: AM9/FM50 Press w or q to select the desired setting. Notes • Turn off CinemaStation after you change the setting. The new setting becomes effective after you turn on CinemaStation again. • Refer to the list below for the frequency spacing. — North, Central and South America: AM10/FM100 — Other areas: AM9/FM50 92 017DVX-S200-en 92 04.3.1, 11:22 AM Using the On Screen Menu Using the On Screen Menu You can use the On Screen Menu to adjust settings for DVD playback, including picture and language settings. Navigating the On Screen Menu For example, adjust the color saturation. Press ON SCREEN. Program Preferences View Toolbar Play Option Setup Search DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR ➡ NIGHT SHIFT TV INPUT TV CH A B C D E Press h or g to select “Preference” in the Main Menu. SLEEP PRESET ON SCREEN PRESET ON SCREEN MENU h Features g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU Picture Toolbar RETURN STATUS Preferences Setup TEST VOLUME TV VOL MUTE g AMP VCR VIDEO 1 TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS CINEMA Press w to enter the submenus. Saturation GAME Features Contrast Picture Color settings Brightness Sharpness Advice To select other items in the submenu, press w first, and press h or g. Using the On Screen Menu DVD/CD MD/CD-R English 93 018DVX-S200-en 93 04.3.1, 11:22 AM Using the On Screen Menu Press w to enter menu items. DVR-S200 WB56620 POWER POWER TV /DTS AUDIO ANGLE SUBTITLE SELECT MATRIX 6.1 REPEAT STEREO A-B SW CENTER SURR NIGHT Saturation Contrast Color settings SHIFT Sharpness TV INPUT TV CH Natural Brightness A B C D E SLEEP PRESET PRESET Press h or g to select “Saturation”. ON SCREEN ON SCREEN MENU h Video shift g CH CH ENTER g SET MENU RETURN STATUS TEST MUTE 0 Contrast ENTER VOLUME TV VOL Saturation Color settings g AMP DVD/CD VCR VIDEO 1 MD/CD-R TUNER VIDEO 2 MOVIE MUSIC SPORTS Press q or w to set. GAME Video shift CINEMA Saturation +2 Contrast Color settings Advice In some cases, you can also use h or g for setting content. Press ENTER, then press ON SCREEN to turn off the On Screen Menu. To set the other menu items, follow the example above. 94 018DVX-S200-en 94 04.3.1, 11:22 AM Using the On Screen Menu On Screen Menu Guide Main Menu Preference Submenu Setting Item Features Status window Picture Video shift Saturation Contrast Color settings (Colour settings) Brightness Sharpness Toolbar Program View Clear All Tracks Program Play list (Playlist) Zoom Play Option Audio Disc Navigation Sub-title (Subtitle) Search Frame by Frame Fast Time Slow Set to “On” to turn on/off the status display using the STATUS button on the Remote Control. The status display includes the type of disc, the currently playing track/chapter number, the total time of track/chapter and the elapsed time of track/chapter. Set to “Off” to hide the status display. Adjust from +1 to +7. Adjusts the screen position. The screen display moves to the right as the number becomes larger. Adjust from -7 to +7. Adjusts the video color saturation. Adjust from -7 to +7. Accentuates bright and dark parts of video. Adjust the video shade. Adjust from -7 to +7. Adjusts the video brightness. Adjust from -7 to +7. Adjusts the video vividness. Deletes all Program content. Page 33 Selects a track. Page 31 Selects Program Play “On”/“Off”. Page 33 Shows Playlist. Page 33 Enlarges the picture. Move + to the point to be enlarged using h, g, q, and w. Each time you press the ENTER key, the zoom changes. To return it to the previous size, select Zoom 1 and press ON SCREEN. Switches the picture angle. When this item is on, the beginning of each chapter can be previewed one by one. Selects the audio language. Select the title, chapter or track to play. Selects the subtitle language. You can only select languages the disc contains. Advances/reverses one frame at a time. Frame Advance is not available with video CD. Select the speed from among -8, -4, 1, 4, 8. Specify an elapsed time and search for a scene. Page 30 Select the speed from among -1, -1/2, -1/4, -1/8, 0, 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1. Using the On Screen Menu Angle Chapter Preview Setting Content English 95 018DVX-S200-en 95 04.3.1, 11:22 AM Using the On Screen Menu Main Menu Setup Submenu Access TV*1 Setting Item Disc Lock Parental level Enter PIN Change PIN TV shape TV System Video Output Language Default Sub-title (Default Subtitle) Country Menu Language Default Audio Audio Menu Digital output Features PBC Setting Content Set the Disc Lock “On”/“Off”. Page 83 Adjust the level from 0 to +8. Page 82 Enter the password. Page 81 Change the password. Page 82 Set to match your TV screen aspect. 4:3 panscan 4:3 letterbox Wide-screen (Widescreen) Set the video signal system*2 to match your TV. Set to AUTO when using a TV compatible with both NTSC and PAL. (U.K. and Europe models only) Sets the output signal of AV MONITOR OUT jack to YUV or RGB. Set the language you usually select for subtitles. When playing a disc, the subtitles in the selected language appear first. When the disc does not contain the selected subtitle language, the subtitle of that language will not appear. Select the country where you use CinemaStation. Set the language for the On Screen Menu. Set the language you usually select for audio. When playing a disc, you hear the audio in the selected language first. When the disc does not contain the selected language you selected, it will play in another language. Select the output signal for the OPTICAL OUT jack. The speaker sound changes depending on the setting for this menu item. All: Outputs all types of digital signals that CinemaStation can reproduce. PCM Only: Outputs the Pro Logic decoded signal only. Set Playback Control “On”/“Off”. If set to “Off”, the Disc Menu does not appear on the TV screen. *1 Be careful when setting this menu item. If it does not match your TV, the menu and playback screen will not appear properly or will not appear on the TV. If that happens, refer to “Recover TV settings” below. 2 * This unit can play PAL and NTSC, but your television must match the system used on the disc. Recover TV settings When the screen does not appear properly due to TV setting, perform the steps below to recover the setting. 1 Press DVD/CD. 2 Press s for 5 seconds. NTSC<->PAL appears in the CinemaStation Display. 3 Press e to switch the setting. NTSC/PAL SET appears in the CinemaStation Display. When connecting with AV MONITOR OUT (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 Perform steps 1 and 2 above. 2 Press s again. YUV<->RGB appears in the CinemaStation Display. 3 Press e to switch the setting. YUV/RGB SET appears in the CinemaStation Display. 96 018DVX-S200-en 96 04.3.1, 11:22 AM Appendix Solutions to Common Problems Be sure to check the points below if CinemaStation doesn’t seem to be working normally for you. If you notice something wrong that is not listed below and you have already tried some solutions with no success, turn off the CinemaStation power, remove the power plug from the outlet and contact the store where you purchased the product or your nearest YAMAHA sound products service center and ask for assistance. General Problems Power turns on but immediately shuts off. Cause 5 Sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/- to regain the sound and adjust the volume to your liking. Cause 1 The power plug is not completely plugged Solution Solution Cause 6 You inserted a CD-ROM that CinemaStation in. Insert the plug into the outlet firmly. cannot play. Cause 2 Speaker cable is shorted. When power is turned on, the protective circuit engages and shuts the system down. Solution Make sure that all speaker cables are correctly connected. Cause 3 CinemaStation received a strong, external electric shock such as from a lightening bolt or excessive static electricity. Solution Put CinemaStation in standby, pull out the electric cord then wait for about 30 seconds before reinserting the cord and turning on the power again. Cause 4 The system cable is not connected properly. Play a source signal that CinemaStation can play. No picture. Cause You did not connect the cable properly. Solution Check your connections. The audio suddenly decreased. Cause The Sleep Time function started working. Solution Turn the power back on and try playing the source again. Connect the system cable securely. Sound is too low on one side. No sound. Cause 1 You did not connect the cable properly. Solution Cause You did not connect the cable properly. Solution Check your connections. Appendix Solution Solution Check your connections. Cause 2 The source you selected is not suitable for playback. Solution Choose the correct source using the Input Selection buttons. Cause 3 You did not connect the Speaker cable Solution English properly. Check your speaker connections. Cause 4 You turned the sound volume down. Solution Turn the sound volume up. 97 019DVX-S200-en 97 04.3.1, 11:23 AM Appendix No sound except from the Front Speakers. No sound from the Surround Speakers. Cause 1 You turned off the Surround Speaker Cause Solution Press STEREO and make sure sound field effect is on. Cause 2 You are playing a source such as Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS that doesn’t contain a special effect signal. Solution Cause volume level. 1 You are listening to STEREO sound. Solution Cause 2 CinemaStation plays a monaural source in the Theater DSP Program. Solution Select another DSP Program. 3 A digital audio sampling frequency over 48 kHz is input. A digital audio sampling frequency over 48 kHz only outputs from the Front Speakers. No sound from the Center Speaker. Turn up the Surround Speaker volume. See page 61. Select another DSP Program. See pages 16 and 17. No sound from the Subwoofer. Cause 1 You set “* BASS” in the SET MENU to “FRONT” when CinemaStation plays a Dolby Digital or DTS source. Solution Set “* BASS” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. See page 64. Cause 1 You turned off the Center Speaker volume level. Solution Turn up the Center Speaker volume. See page 61. Cause 2 You set “* BASS” in the SET MENU to “FRONT” or “SWFR” when CinemaStation plays a 2-channel source. Solution Set “* BASS” to “BOTH”. See page 64. Cause 2 You set “* CENTER” in the SET MENU to “NON”. Solution Set the Center Speaker correctly. See page 64. Cause 3 The source doesn’t contain an LFE or other low tone signal (below 90 Hz). No low tones. Cause 3 You have selected a DSP Program from the Music group (excluding 5ch Stereo). Solution Select another DSP Program. See pages 16 and 17. Cause The Speaker mode you selected in the SET MENU does not match your speaker. Solution Set the appropriate Speaker mode based on the size of the speakers you are using. See page 63. Cause 4 Dolby Digital and DTS sources do not contain a center channel signal. Strange humming noises. Cause You did not connect the pin cable properly. Solution Check your pin cable connections. 98 019DVX-S200-en 98 04.3.1, 11:23 AM Appendix Sound volume will not increase. Cause Solution The power of the device connected to CinemaStation’s output jack is not turned on. If the power of the device connected to the output jack is not turned on, playback may be distorted and volume low. Turn on the power of the connected device. Sound field effect cannot be recorded. Cause Digital and high frequency devices create noise. Cause CinemaStation is placed too close to a digital or high frequency device. Solution Place CinemaStation further away from such devices. SET MENU setting content has disappeared. Cause The power cord has not been connected to the outlet for over a week or the time set for the external timer has past, which turned off the power, more than a week ago. Solution Set the SET MENU again. It is not possible to record audio enhanced by a sound field effect. Audio recording will not work. Cause 1 You are trying to make a digital recording with an analog source. Solution Try inputting a digital source. Cause 2 CinemaStation and the recording device are not connected digitally. Solution Connect them digitally. Cause 3 You are trying to make an analog recording with a digital source. Solution Try inputting an analog source. Cause 4 CinemaStation, the playback device and the recording device do not share an analog connection. Solution Connect them with an analog connection. Appendix Cause 5 Some recording devices are not able to record a digital source such as Dolby Digital or DTS. CinemaStation is not working normally. Cause The internal microcomputer froze up due to electric shock (lightening bolt or excessive static electricity) or drop in power supply. Solution Pull out the AC plug from the outlet and after about 30 seconds plug it in again. English 99 019DVX-S200-en 99 04.3.1, 11:23 AM Appendix Disc Playback One of the buttons doesn’t work. Cause Some discs do not allow certain operations. Playback does not start when pressing w, or it immediately stops. Viewing angle does not change. Cause VCR recording does not work. Cause 1 When moved from a very cold place to a warm one, condensation forms on the lens. Solution cannot play. Cause 3 The disc is dirty. Solution Set the disc in the tray correctly. See page 11. Audio or subtitle language does not switch. Cause 1 The disc does not contain multiple audio or subtitle languages. Cause 2 Use the Disc Menu to change audio or Picture looks poor while fast forwarding or reversing. Cause To some degree the picture does not look normal, but this is not a defect. The television (monitor) has no picture. (Or the screen size looks strange.) Cause 1 The setting in the On Screen Menu is not correct. Solution No subtitles appear. Cause 1 DVD does not contain subtitle data. Cause 2 The subtitle setting is off. Select Setup → TV in the On Screen Menu to set the menu item correctly. Cause 2 The television cannot handle progressive input. Solution subtitle languages. See page 36. Solution Almost all DVD discs are copy protected, so you cannot copy them. Wipe the disc clean. Cause 4 The disc is not set in the tray correctly. Solution Cause Do not use for 1 to 2 hours. Cause 2 You inserted a disc that CinemaStation You can only use this feature if you are playing a disc recorded with multiple angles. Turn off CinemaStation’s progressive output and change to interlace input on the television. See page 80. Part of picture appears double with progressive output. Cause The disc content does not match the progressive output due to the editing method or other conditions. Solution Turn off CinemaStation’s progressive output and change to interlace input on the television (monitor). See page 80. Turn on subtitles. See page 13. Cause 3 When using A-B Repeat subtitles sometimes do not appear before and after points A and B. The picture quality is poor. Solution Adjust the picture quality using “Picture” in the On Screen Menu. See page 95. No Status display appears. Solution Under “Features” in the On Screen Menu, switch the “Status window” to “On”. See page 95. 100 019DVX-S200-en 100 04.3.1, 11:24 AM Appendix The disc is ejected as soon as it is inserted. A disc that cannot be played has been inserted. Cause “No Disc” appears in the CinemaStation Display. Cause No disc is inserted or a disc is inserted incorrectly. Solution Set the disc in the tray correctly. See page 11. Radio Reception Auto Tuning does not work. FM/AM Preset Tuning does not work. Cause 1 The Preset (memory) has been deleted. Solution Perform the Preset operation again. See page 41. Cause Solution 1 Try Manual Tuning. See page 40. Solution 2 Change your outdoor FM antenna for a multi-channel one. AM FM Too much noise blocks out stereo broadcast. Auto Tuning does not work. Cause Cause The radio station is far away from your area or your antenna is weak. The radio station is far away from your area or your antenna is weak. Solution 1 Change the AM Loop antenna’s direction. See page 38. Solution 1 Check your antenna connection. And change your outdoor FM antenna for a multichannel one. Solution 2 Try Manual Tuning. See page 40. Cause You are experiencing multipath reflection and other radio interference. Solution Change the antenna’s height, direction or placement. Solution 2 Try Manual Tuning. See page 40. Too much noise. Cause Solution Noise can be related to atmospheric electricity and lightning, or fluorescent lights, motors and thermostats attached to electric devices. Appendix Audio is distorted and the receiver sensitivity is poor even with outdoor FM antenna. The radio waves are weak or your antenna is not completely connected. Connecting the outdoor AM antenna and establishing good grounding will decrease noise. However, it is difficult to completely eliminate noise. Too much noise, especially in the evening. A television is in use near CinemaStation. Solution Place the television further away from CinemaStation. English Cause 101 019DVX-S200-en 101 04.3.1, 11:24 AM Appendix Remote Control The Remote Control does not work. A peripheral device does not work with the Remote Control. Cause 1 You are outside the Remote Control Solution operating range. Cause 1 You cannot operate a system component. Operate the Remote Control within 6 m (20 feet) and a 30° angle of the Remote Control Sensor. Solution Cause 2 The Remote Control Sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or lighting (inverted fluorescent lamps). Solution Use the remote control that came with the device to operate it. Cause 2 You did not correctly set the manufacturer code. Solution Change the lighting or CinemaStation’s orientation. • Set the manufacturer code once again. See page 84. • Set a different code from the list of codes for the same manufacturer. See pages 87 and 88. Cause 3 The batteries are worn out. Solution Replace the batteries with new ones. Cause 4 You did not select the device to operate. Solution Cause 3 The Remote Control is not compatible with your equipment. Solution Use the remote control that came with the device to operate it. Press the Input Selection buttons to select the device you want to operate. Remote Control does not work with CinemaStation. Cause You did not select the mode to operate CinemaStation. Solution Press DVD/CD, AMP or TUNER on the Remote Control before starting operation. 102 019DVX-S200-en 102 04.3.1, 11:24 AM Appendix Information Disc information The table below lists the types of discs you can play on CinemaStation. Video Discs Type of Disc Disc Logo Mark DVD Video SVCD (Super Video CD) DIGITAL VIDEO Video CD DIGITAL VIDEO Video CDs made by copying an MPEG movie file onto a CD-R or CD-RW. DVD region codes The region code (an ID number assigned to each market region) is set for normal DVD players and DVD video discs. CinemaStation can play the discs with the region codes shown below on the right. For more details read the information on the disc jacket. Destination Region code of CinemaStation Playable discs 1 1 ALL U.K. Europe 2 2 ALL Australia 4 4 ALL Korea General Asia 3 3 ALL Appendix U.S.A. Canada Music Discs Type of Disc Disc Logo Mark Music CD (Compact disc digital audio) Super Audio CD English Music CDs made by copying onto a CD-R or CD-RW. Music in MP3 format can also be played. Advice • Disc logo marks are printed on the disc and the disc jacket. 103 019DVX-S200-en 103 04.3.1, 11:24 AM Appendix Handling a disc Notes • The following discs cannot be played with this unit. CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, CDV. • CinemaStation cannot play a CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, DVDRW, DVD+R or DVD+RW disc that has not been finalized. Finalizing is a process that prepares a disc for playback on a compatible device. • This product can play some types of DVD-R (Video format only), DVD-RW (Video format only), DVD+R or DVD+RW discs. • Only use discs from a reputable manufacturer. Some discs cannot be played back, depending on recording conditions and disc characteristics. • Do not use discs with non-standard shapes or sizes. • Some DVD video or video CD discs may operate and function differently than noted in this manual. That is by manufacturer design and not a defect in this unit. For more details read the information on the disc jacket. • This unit can play the disc types associated with the logos shown on page 103. (Do not attempt to load any other type of disc into the unit, or the unit may be damaged.) • Some discs cannot be played depending on the recording conditions such as PC environment and application software. Failure can also result from disc characteristics and condition, like material quality, scratches or curvature. • Do not touch the surface of the disc. Hold a disc by its edge and center hole. • Do not leave a disc in the tray when you are not playing it. • Do not write on the disc with a pencil or other marker. • Do not stick tape, seals or other attachments to a disc, and do not bring into contact with glue. • Do not use a protective cover to prevent scratches. • Do not use a disc whose surface can be printed with a commercially available label printer. • Do not put a disc in a place with direct sunlight, high temperature, high humidity or a lot of dust. Caution • If a disc becomes dirty, wipe it with a clean, dry cloth from the center out to the edge. Do not use record cleaner or paint thinner. Super Audio CD CinemaStation can play Super Audio CDs in the same manner as music CDs. However, CinemaStation cannot use the following functions for playing Super Audio CDs because the signal circuit is completely independent. • DSP Program • Input Signal Information Display • To avoid malfunction, do not use a commercially available lens cleaner. 104 019DVX-S200-en 104 2004.04.28, 16:14 Appendix Copyright and logo marks This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System with a built-in power amplifier This subwoofer system (NX-SW200) employs Advanced Yamaha Active Servo Technology which YAMAHA has developed for reproducing higher quality super-bass sound. This super-bass sound adds a more realistic, theater-in-the-home effect to your stereo system. QD-Bass (Quatre Dispersion Bass) technology uses square, pyramid-shaped reflective plates to radiate the sound in four horizontal directions. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Appendix “DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. English 105 019DVX-S200-en 105 04.3.1, 11:24 AM Appendix Glossary Bit Stream A signal that is compressed and changed into digital format. Then depending on the decoder it can be processed as 5.1 multi-channel audio. By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment can be reproduced, like the rustling of trees or sound of waves. Channel (ch) Dolby Pro Logic A channel is an audio type that has been divided based on range and other characteristics. E.g. 5.1 channel • Front Speakers, Left (1ch), Right (1ch) • Center Speaker (1 ch) • Surround Speakers, Left (1ch), Right (1ch) • Subwoofer (1 ch x 0.1* = 0.1 ch) A surround system that takes a 4-channel signal and records it as a 2-channel signal, then by way of some arithmetic processing converts back to an independent 4channel signal for playback. * In contrast to a full 1-channel band, a component designed to enhance low frequency sound for added effect. Cinema DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Dolby Surround and DTS were originally designed for the movie theater, so playing the same program at home would produce disparate listening experiences depending on variables like the room size, walling and number of speakers. Yamaha Cinema DSP applies original sound field technology based on a wealth of real-world data measurements to reproduce Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS sound, combining them with acoustic scale, depth and tone so that you can experience the presence of a movie theater at home. Dolby Pro Logic II Takes any 2-channel source and reproduces dynamic 5.1-channel surround with excellent separation using special signal processing. You can experience Dolby Pro Logic II in MOVIE mode and MUSIC mode for stereo. You can even enjoy old movies that were only recorded in 2-channel audio (excluding monaural) in powerful 5.1-channel surround. DTS (Digital Theater Systems) The 5.1-channel surround system adopted by most movie theaters. With an abundance of audio data, it is able to provide authentic sounding effects. Dynamic Range The difference between the smallest sound that can be heard above the equipment noise and the biggest sound that can be heard without distortion is the dynamic range. Component Video Signal A component video signal is separated into one luminance Y-signal and two chrominance PB/CB and PR/ CR signals. Since each signal is sent independently, color can be reproduced more faithfully. The component signal is also called a color-difference signal by the way it subtracts the luminance signal from the color signals. Decoder A device that converts encoded data on DVD and other media back to its original audio or video signal. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 fullrange audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels. Film and Video Data In general, DVD media can be classified into the 2 types below. • Film Data Video recorded at 24 frames/second. (The film used for shooting movies is recorded at 24 frames/second.) Recently 30 frames/second progressive video has made its debut. • Video Data Video recorded at 30 frames/second. CinemaStation will automatically recognize whether the source recorded on DVD is film or video, then select the best method to convert it into progressive output. Interlace and Progressive Outputs Up to now the standard video signal has been NTSC with 525i (i: interlaced) scan lines. In contrast, 525p (p: progressive) is a high-density signal with double the number of scan lines. 106 019DVX-S200-en 106 04.3.1, 11:24 AM Appendix LFE (Low Frequency Effect) 0.1 Channel Sampling Frequency and Quantized Bit Rate This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. It is added to the full-range 5 channels in Dolby Digital and DTS to enhance low frequency sound for added effect. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range. When converting an analog signal to digital, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the quantized bit rate. The frequency band that can be played back is determined by the sampling rate while the dynamic range expressing the difference in sound level is determined by the quantized bit rate. In principle, the higher the sampling rate, the wider the frequency range that can be played back. And the higher the quantized bit rate the finer the sound that can be reproduced. Linear PCM (LPCM) A signal that is changed to digital format without compression. A CD is recorded with 16-bit sound at 44.1kHz, while DVD recording is anywhere from 16 bits at 48 kHz to 24 bits at 192 kHz, which makes it a higher quality sound than CD. This signal also has a type called Packed PCM (P.PCM) that can be compressed without any loss of data. Matrix 6.1 CinemaStation incorporates a Matrix 6.1 decoder for Dolby Digital and DTS multi-channel software that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. (The surround back channel is created from surround left and right channels, and output from a virtual surround back speaker.) With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially scenes with "fly-over" and "fly-around" effects. NTSC “SILENT CINEMA” “SILENT CINEMA” is an original Yamaha system that reproduces in a pair of headphones the acoustic personality of sound field programs based on multispeakers. Headphone parameters have been set for each sound field so that natural stereoscopic sound can be expressed and enjoyed through headphones. S-Video Signal With S-video the video signal that was normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as a luminance Y-signal and chrominance Csignal through an S video cable. Connecting with an S VIDEO jack you can enjoy recording and playback with more beautiful images. NTSC is a video signal system (525 lines, 30 frames per second) used in North America, Central America, a number of South American countries, and some Asian countries, including Japan. Title, Chapter (DVD Video) Pan & Scan and Letter Box Track (CD/Video CD) In general, DVD Video is produced for viewing on a wide television screen with an aspect ratio of 16:9. This means you can now view most material with the intended aspect ratio on a wide-screen television. This ratio will not fit on a standard television that has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Two picture styles, Pan & Scan and Letterbox, deal with this problem. • Pan & Scan cuts off the left and right portions of the picture to fill the screen. • Letterbox inserts black bands at the top and bottom of the picture to reproduce an aspect ratio of 16:9. A CD or Video CD can be divided into a number of segments (tracks). Each division is called a title number. DVD video lets you divide a disc in a big way by titles or a small way by chapters. Each division is either called a title number or a chapter number. Appendix Virtual Cinema DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Reproduces a surround speaker sound field to let you enjoy virtual Center and Surround L/R Speakers with only two Front L/R Speakers. English PAL PAL is a video signal system (625 lines, 25 frames per second) used in the United Kingdom, much of the rest of western Europe, several South American countries, some Middle East and Asian countries, several African countries, Australia, New Zealand, and other Pacific island countries. 107 019DVX-S200-en 107 04.3.1, 11:24 AM Appendix Index 5ch Stereo ...................................................................... 17 A A-B Repeat .................................................................... 35 Action ............................................................................ 17 I, J Input Assign ................................................................... 92 Input Mode .................................................................... 92 Input Modes ................................................................... 77 Jazz Club ....................................................................... 17 L C Changing the Order of Preset Stations .......................... 43 CinemaStation Display brightness ................................ 92 Classic Hall .................................................................... 17 Connecting a CD or MD recorder ................................. 50 Connecting a Game Console ......................................... 46 Connecting a VCR ......................................................... 46 Connecting the Antennas ............................................... 38 Connecting the Speakers ................................................. 8 Connecting the TV .......................................................... 8 Connect a TV to an audio input ................................. 47 Connecting with S-video ................................................. 9 D L/R Balance ................................................................... 91 LEF Level ...................................................................... 91 Live Sports .................................................................... 17 M, N Matrix 6.1 ...................................................................... 65 MP3 ............................................................................... 37 Music Video ................................................................... 17 Night Listening .............................................................. 71 No Disc ........................................................................ 101 Non-skid pad ........................................................... 54, 55 O, P D. Range ........................................................................ 91 Delay Time .................................................................... 72 Digital audio jacks ......................................................... 51 Disc information .......................................................... 103 Discs this unit cannot play back .............................. 104 Handling a disc ........................................................ 104 Music Discs ............................................................. 103 Video Discs .............................................................. 103 Disc Lock ...................................................................... 83 Disc Menu ..................................................................... 36 Display Set .................................................................... 92 Dolby Digital Surround EX disc ................................... 65 Drama ............................................................................ 17 DSP Program ................................................................. 17 DTS ES disc .................................................................. 65 DVD region codes ....................................................... 103 F Fastener ......................................................................... 54 Finding the Best DSP Effect .......................................... 16 Frame Advance .............................................................. 29 G, H On Screen Menu ............................................................ 24 On Screen Menu Guide ............................................. 95 Using the On Screen Menu ........................................ 93 Original Dolby and DTS Sound .................................... 74 Parental Control ............................................................. 81 Placing the Speakers ........................................................ 7 Playback Control (PBC) ................................................ 36 PRO LOGIC II Movie ................................................... 67 PRO LOGIC II Music ................................................... 67 Pro Logic II Music setting ......................................... 68 Program Play ................................................................. 31 Progressive Scan ............................................................ 80 R Reassign input jacks ...................................................... 92 Recording Audio from CinemaStation .......................... 53 Remote Control ............................................................. 21 Amp Mode ................................................................. 22 DVD/CD Mode .......................................................... 23 Tuner Mode ................................................................ 21 Using the Remote Control ......................................... 21 Repeat Play .................................................................... 34 Rock Concert ................................................................. 17 Game ............................................................................. 17 HP Tone CTRL .............................................................. 91 108 019DVX-S200-en 108 04.3.1, 11:24 AM Appendix S SA-CD Delay ................................................................ 91 Sci-Fi (Science Fiction) ................................................. 17 Selecting Radio Stations ................................................ 39 Auto Tuning ............................................................... 39 Manual Tuning ........................................................... 40 Preset Tuning ............................................................. 43 SET MENU ................................................................... 91 Setting Channels in Advance (Preset) ........................... 41 Auto Preset ................................................................ 41 Manual Preset ............................................................ 42 Setting the Manufacturer Code ...................................... 84 “SILENT CINEMA” ..................................................... 70 Sleep Timer .................................................................... 79 Slow Advance/Reverse .................................................. 29 SP Delay ........................................................................ 91 Speaker Mode ................................................................ 63 Speaker Size .................................................................. 63 Speaker Volume Level ............................................. 59, 61 5ch Stereo DSP Program ........................................... 62 Spectacle ........................................................................ 17 Stereo playback ............................................................. 17 Super Audio CD .......................................................... 104 T Test Tone ........................................................................ 59 Theater ........................................................................... 17 Time Search ................................................................... 30 To change discs .............................................................. 12 Tuner Step ...................................................................... 92 Types of Input Signals ................................................... 76 V Virtual Cinema DSP ...................................................... 69 Appendix English 109 019DVX-S200-en 109 04.3.1, 11:24 AM Appendix Specifications AUDIO SECTION Minimum RMS Output Power FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6Ω ........................................... 85 W U.S.A. and Canada models 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6Ω ........................ 80 W Maximum Power (EIAJ) (Asia, Korea and General models only) FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6Ω ........................................... 100 W Total Harmonic Distortion FRONT L/R (20 W, 1 kHz) .................. Less than 0.05 % Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network, 200 mV shorted) ............................................................................... 95 dB Input Sensitivity VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2 (VIDEO), VCR, MD/CD-R ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ Output Level (when 200mV is input) REC OUT ............................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT (SUBWOOFER) ....................................... 4 V Headphones .............................................. 220 mV/100 Ω VIDEO SECTION Video Signal Level Video ............................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S Video (Y/C) ......................... 1 Vp-p/0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω Component (Y/PB, PR) ................. 1 Vp-p/0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................... 50 dB TUNER SECTION FM Tuning Range U.S.A. and Canada models ................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz Other models ...................................... 87.5 to 108.0 MHz AM Tuning Range U.S.A., Canada and Korea models ....... 530 to 1710 kHz U.K., Europe and Australia models ...... 531 to 1611 kHz Asia and General models ...... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz SPEAKERS Satellite Speakers (Front and Surround Speakers) Model Name ..................................................... NX-S200 Type ............... 2-way acoustic suspension magnetic shielding type Driver .... Tweeter: 2.5 cm (1 inch) balanced dome magnetic shielding type Woofer: 5 cm (2 inch) cone magnetic shielding type Impedance ................................................................... 6Ω Center Speaker Model Name .................................................... NX-C200 Type ............... 2-way acoustic suspension magnetic shielding type Driver .... Tweeter: 2.5 cm (1 inch) balanced dome magnetic shielding type Woofer: 5 cm (2 inch) cone magnetic shielding type Impedance ................................................................... 6Ω Subwoofer Model Name ................................................. NX-SW200 Type ........ Advanced YAMAHA Active Servo Technology system Driver ................ 20 cm (8 inch) cone, magnetic shielding type GENERAL Power Supply U.S.A. and Canada models ................... AC 120 V/60 Hz Australia model ..................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz U.K. and Europe models ....................... AC 230 V/50 Hz Korea model .......................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz Asia model ............................... AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz General model .......................... AC 110-120 V, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption DVR-S200 ............................................................ 130 W NX-SW200 ............................................................. 85 W Standby Power Consumption DVR-S200 Asia and General models ....................................... 0.5 W Other models ........................................................ 0.35 W Laser Pickup Type .................................. Semiconductor laser GaAlAs Wave length ............ 650 nm (DVD), 790 nm (VCD/CD) Output Power .... 1.45 mW (DVD), 1.31 mW (VCD/CD) Dimensions (W ✕ H ✕ D) DVR-S200 ...................................... 360 ✕ 80 ✕ 361 mm (14 3/16⬙ x 3 5/32⬙ x 14 7/32⬙) NX-SW200 ................................... 232 ✕ 415 ✕ 388 mm (9 1/8⬙ x 16 11/32⬙ x 15 9/32⬙) NX-C200 ........................................... 300 ✕ 72 ✕ 81 mm (11 13/16⬙ x 2 27/32⬙ x 3 3/16⬙) NX-S200 ........................................... 72 ✕ 230 ✕ 81 mm (2 27/32⬙ x 9 1/16⬙ x 3 3/16⬙) Weight DVR-S200 ........................................ 6.5 kg (14 lbs 5 oz) NX-SW200 ....................................... 9.6 kg (21 lbs 3 oz) NX-C200 ............................................. 1.1 kg (2 lbs 6 oz) NX-S200 ............................................. 1.0 kg (2 lbs 3 oz) Operating Temperature Range ........ +5 to +35°C (41 to 95°F) Operating Humidity Range ...... 5 to 90% (No Condensation) Accessories ........................................................... See page 6. Specifications are subject to change without notice. 110 019DVX-S200-en 110 04.3.1, 11:24 AM UB DVD HOME THEATER SOUND SYSTEM DVX-S200 (DVR-S200+NX-S200+NX-C200+NX-SW200) DVD/Super Audio CD RECEIVER DVR-S200 © 2004 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA cv_DVX-S200_UB.p65 1 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia OWNER’S MANUAL WB85540-3 2004.05.26, 13:03